Yamaha RX-V650 Manual de usuario

Marca: Yamaha

Modelo: RX-V650

Categoría: Receptores AV

Tipo: Manual de usuario

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA

6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.

YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD.

135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA

YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H.

SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, F.R. OF GERMANY

YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A.

RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD.

YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND

YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B.

J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN

YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD.

17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA

Printed in Malaysia WC85550

RX-V650

AV Receiver

OWNER’S MANUAL

RXV650_U_cv.fm Page 1 Thursday, January 15, 2004 3:28 PM

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

• Explanation of Graphical Symbols

The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an

equilateral triangle, is intended to alert you to the

presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within

the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient

magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to

persons.

The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle

is intended to alert you to the presence of important

operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in

the literature accompanying the appliance.

1 Read Instructions – All the safety and operating instructions

should be read before the product is operated.

2 Retain Instructions – The safety and operating instructions

should be retained for future reference.

3 Heed Warnings – All warnings on the product and in the

operating instructions should be adhered to.

4 Follow Instructions – All operating and use instructions

should be followed.

5 Cleaning – Unplug this product from the wall outlet before

cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners. Use

a damp cloth for cleaning.

6 Attachments – Do not use attachments not recommended by

the product manufacturer as they may cause hazards.

7 Water and Moisture – Do not use this product near water –

for example, near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen sink, or

laundry tub; in a wet basement; or near a swimming pool;

and the like.

8 Accessories – Do not place this product on an unstable cart,

stand, tripod, bracket, or table. The product may fall,

causing serious injury to a child or adult, and serious

damage to the product. Use only with a cart, stand, tripod,

bracket, or table recommended by the manufacturer, or sold

with the product. Any mounting of the product should

follow the manufacturer’s instructions, and should use a

mounting accessory recommended by the manufacturer.

9 A product and cart combination should be moved with care.

Quick stops, excessive force, and uneven

surfaces may cause the product and cart

combination to overturn.

10 Ventilation – Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided

for ventilation and to ensure reliable operation of the

product and to protect it from overheating, and these

openings must not be blocked or covered. The openings

should never be blocked by placing the product on a bed,

sofa, rug, or other similar surface. This product should not

be placed in a built-in installation such as a bookcase or rack

unless proper ventilation is provided or the manufacturer’s

instructions have been adhered to.

11 Power Sources – This product should be operated only from

the type of power source indicated on the marking label. If

you are not sure of the type of power supply to your home,

consult your product dealer or local power company. For

products intended to operate from battery power, or other

sources, refer to the operating instructions.

12 Grounding or Polarization – This product may be equipped

with a polarized alternating current line plug (a plug having

one blade wider than the other). This plug will fit into the

power outlet only one way. This is a safety feature. If you

are unable to insert the plug fully into the outlet, try

reversing the plug. If the plug should still fail to fit, contact

your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not

defeat the safety purpose of the polarized plug.

13 Power-Cord Protection – Power-supply cords should be

routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched

by items placed upon or against them, paying particular

attention to cords at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the

point where they exit from the product.

14 Lightning – For added protection for this product during a

lightning storm, or when it is left unattended and unused for

long periods of time, unplug it from the wall outlet and

disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will prevent

damage to the product due to lightning and power-line

surges.

15 Power Lines – An outside antenna system should not be

located in the vicinity of overhead power lines or other

electric light or power circuits, or where it can fall into such

power lines or circuits. When installing an outside antenna

system, extreme care should be taken to keep from touching

such power lines or circuits as contact with them might be

fatal.

16 Overloading – Do not overload wall outlets, extension

cords, or integral convenience receptacles as this can result

in a risk of fire or electric shock.

17 Object and Liquid Entry – Never push objects of any kind

into this product through openings as they may touch

dangerous voltage points or short-out parts that could result

in a fire or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind on

the product.

18 Servicing – Do not attempt to service this product yourself

as opening or removing covers may expose you to

dangerous voltage or other hazards. Refer all servicing to

qualified service personnel.

19 Damage Requiring Service – Unplug this product from the

wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel

under the following conditions:

a) When the power-supply cord or plug is damaged,

b) If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen into the

product,

c) If the product has been exposed to rain or water,

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

CAUTION

CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF

ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE

COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE

PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO

QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page i Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING

MAST

GROUND

CLAMP

ANTENNA

LEAD IN

WIRE

ANTENNA

DISCHARGE UNIT

(NEC SECTION 810–20)

GROUNDING CONDUCTORS

(NEC SECTION 810–21)

GROUND CLAMPS

POWER SERVICE GROUNDING

ELECTRODE SYSTEM

(NEC ART 250. PART H)

ELECTRIC

SERVICE

EQUIPMENT

NEC – NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

d) If the product does not operate normally by following

the operating instructions. Adjust only those controls

that are covered by the operating instructions as an

improper adjustment of other controls may result in

damage and will often require extensive work by a

qualified technician to restore the product to its normal

operation,

e) If the product has been dropped or damaged in any

way, and

f) When the product exhibits a distinct change in perfor-

mance - this indicates a need for service.

20 Replacement Parts – When replacement parts are required,

be sure the service technician has used replacement parts

specified by the manufacturer or have the same

characteristics as the original part. Unauthorized

substitutions may result in fire, electric shock, or other

hazards.

21 Safety Check – Upon completion of any service or repairs to

this product, ask the service technician to perform safety

checks to determine that the product is in proper operating

condition.

22 Wall or Ceiling Mounting – The unit should be mounted

to a wall or ceiling only as recommended by the

manufacturer.

23 Heat – The product should be situated away from heat

sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other

products (including amplifiers) that produce heat.

24 Outdoor Antenna Grounding – If an outside antenna or

cable system is connected to the product, be sure the antenna

or cable system is grounded so as to provide some

protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges.

Article 810 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70,

provides information with regard to proper grounding of the

mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire

to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding conductors,

location of antenna discharge unit, connection to grounding

electrodes, and requirements for the grounding electrode.

Note to CATV system installer:

This reminder is provided to call the CATV system installer’s

attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC that provides

guidelines for proper grounding and, in particular, specifies

that the cable ground shall be connected to the grounding

system of the building, as close to the point of cable entry as

practical.

FCC INFORMATION (for US customers)

1 IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS

UNIT!

This product, when installed as indicated in the

instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC

requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by

Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to

use the product.

2 IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to

accessories and/or another product use only high quality

shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST

be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to

follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to

use this product in the USA.

3 NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply

with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15

for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these

requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that

your use of this product in a residential environment will

not result in harmful interference with other electronic

devices.

This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if

not installed and used according to the instructions found

in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the

operation of other electronic devices.

Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that

interference will not occur in all installations. If this

product is found to be the source of interference, which

can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”,

please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the

following measures:

Relocate either this product or the device that is being

affected by the interference.

Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit

breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s.

In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient

the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead,

change the lead-in to coaxial type cable.

If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory

results, please contact the local retailer authorized to

distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the

appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Electronics

Corp., U.S.A. 6660 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA

90620.

The above statements apply ONLY to those products

distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its

subsidiaries.

00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page ii Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM

CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT.

iii

1 To assure the finest performance, please read this

manual carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future

reference.

2 Install this sound system in a well ventilated, cool,

dry, clean place — away from direct sunlight, heat

sources, vibration, dust, moisture, and/or cold.

Allow ventilation space of at least 30 cm on the top,

20 cm on the left and right, and 20 cm on the back of

this unit.

3 Locate this unit away from other electrical

appliances, motors, or transformers to avoid

humming sounds.

4 Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature

changes from cold to hot, and do not locate this unit

in a environment with high humidity (i.e. a room with

a humidifier) to prevent condensation inside this

unit, which may cause an electrical shock, fire,

damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.

5 Avoid installing this unit where foreign object may

fall onto this unit and/or this unit may be exposed to

liquid dripping or splashing. On the top of this unit,

do not place:

– Other components, as they may cause damage

and/or discoloration on the surface of this unit.

– Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause

fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.

– Containers with liquid in them, as they may fall

and liquid may cause electrical shock to the user

and/or damage to this unit.

6 Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth,

curtain, etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If

the temperature inside this unit rises, it may cause

fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.

7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all

connections are complete.

8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may

overheat, possibly causing damage.

9 Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords.

10 When disconnecting the power cord from the wall

outlet, grasp the plug; do not pull the cord.

11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this

might damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth.

12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used.

Using this unit with a higher voltage than specified

is dangerous and may cause fire, damage to this

unit, and/or personal injury. YAMAHA will not be

held responsible for any damage resulting from use

of this unit with a voltage other than specified.

13 To prevent damage by lightning, disconnect the

power cord from the wall outlet during an electrical

storm.

14 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact

qualified YAMAHA service personnel when any

service is needed. The cabinet should never be

opened for any reasons.

15 When not planning to use this unit for long periods

of time (i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC power plug

from the wall outlet.

16 Be sure to read the “TROUBLESHOOTING” section

on common operating errors before concluding that

this unit is faulty.

17 Before moving this unit, press STANDBY/ON to set

this unit in the standby mode, and disconnect the

AC power plug from the wall outlet.

18 VOLTAGE SELECTOR (Asia and General models

only)

The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this

unit must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE

plugging into the AC main supply. Voltages are:

Asia model ...................... 220/230-240 V AC, 50/60 Hz

General model .. 110/120/220/230-240 V AC, 50/60 Hz

We Want You Listening For A Lifetime

YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries Association's Consumer

Electronics Group want you to get the most out of your

equipment by playing it at a safe level. One that lets the sound

come through loud and clear without annoying blaring or

distortion - and, most importantly, without affecting your

sensitive hearing.

Since hearing damage from loud sounds is often

undetectable until it is too late, YA M A H A and the

Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer

Electronics Group recommend you to avoid

prolonged exposure from excessive volume levels.

CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT.

WARNING

TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC

SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN

OR MOISTURE.

This unit is not disconnected from the AC power source as

long as it is connected to the wall outlet, even if this unit itself

is turned off. This state is called the standby mode. In this

state, this unit is designed to consume a very small quantity of

power.

FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS

To prevent electric shock, match wide blade of plug to

wide slot and fully insert.

This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian

ICES-003.

IMPORTANT

Please record the serial number of this unit in the space

below.

MODEL:

Serial No.:

The serial number is located on the rear of the unit.

Retain this Owner’s Manual in a safe place for future

reference.

00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page iii Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM

English

PREPARATIONINTRODUCTION

BASIC

OPERATION

SOUND FIELD

PROGRAMS

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

FEATURES............................................................. 2

GETTING STARTED............................................ 3

Supplied accessories .................................................. 3

Installing batteries in the remote control ................... 3

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS ......................... 4

Front panel ................................................................. 4

Remote control........................................................... 6

Using the remote control ........................................... 7

Front panel display .................................................... 8

Rear panel ................................................................ 10

SPEAKER SETUP ............................................... 11

Speaker placement ................................................... 11

Speaker connections ................................................ 12

CONNECTIONS .................................................. 15

Before connecting components................................ 15

Connecting video components................................. 16

Connecting audio components................................. 19

Connecting the antennas.......................................... 21

Connecting the power supply cord .......................... 22

Turning on the power............................................... 24

AUTO SETUP....................................................... 25

Introduction.............................................................. 25

Optimizer microphone setup.................................... 25

Starting the setup ..................................................... 26

PLAYBACK.......................................................... 30

Basic operations....................................................... 30

Selecting sound field programs ............................... 32

Selecting input modes.............................................. 36

TUNING ................................................................ 38

Automatic and manual tuning.................................. 38

Presetting stations .................................................... 39

Selecting preset stations........................................... 41

Exchanging preset stations ...................................... 42

RECORDING ....................................................... 43

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM

DESCRIPTIONS...............................................44

For movie/video sources.......................................... 44

For music sources .................................................... 47

ADVANCED OPERATIONS ..............................48

Selecting the OSD mode.......................................... 48

Using the sleep timer ............................................... 48

Manually adjusting speaker levels........................... 49

Using the test tone ................................................... 50

SET MENU ............................................................51

Using SET MENU................................................... 52

1 SOUND MENU.................................................... 53

2 INPUT MENU...................................................... 57

3 OPTION MENU................................................... 58

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ...................60

Control area ............................................................. 60

Setting manufacturer codes...................................... 61

Controlling other components ................................. 62

Clearing setup manufacturer codes.......................... 63

ZONE 2 (U.S.A., Canada and Australia

models only) .......................................................64

Zone 2 connections .................................................. 64

Remote controlling Zone 2 ...................................... 65

EDITING SOUND FIELD PARAMETERS ......67

What is a sound field ............................................... 67

Changing parameter settings ................................... 67

SOUND FIELD PARAMETER

DESCRIPTIONS...............................................69

TROUBLESHOOTING .......................................73

RESETTING THE FACTORY PRESETS ........78

GLOSSARY...........................................................79

Audio formats .......................................................... 79

Sound field programs............................................... 80

Audio information ................................................... 80

Video signal information ......................................... 81

SPECIFICATIONS...............................................82

CONTENTS

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC OPERATION

SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS

ADVANCED OPERATION

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 1 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM

FEATURES

Built-in 7-channel power amplifier

◆ Minimum RMS output power

(0.06% THD, 20 Hz – 20 kHz, 8Ω)

Front: 95 W + 95 W

Center: 95 W

Surround: 95 W + 95 W

Surround back: 95 W + 95 W

Sound field features

◆ Proprietary YAMAHA technology for the creation of

sound fields

◆ Dolby Digital/Dolby Digital EX decoder

◆ DTS/DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, Discrete 6.1, DTS Neo:6,

DTS 96/24 decoder

◆ Dolby Pro Logic/Dolby Pro Logic II/Dolby Pro Logic

IIx decoder

◆ Virtual CINEMA DSP

◆ SILENT CINEMA

™

Sophisticated AM/FM tuner

◆ 40-station random access preset tuning

◆ Automatic preset tuning

◆ Preset station shifting capability (preset editing)

Other features

◆ YPAO: YAMAHA Parametric Room Acoustic

Optimizer for automatic speaker setup

◆ 192-kHz/24-bit D/A converter

◆ A SET MENU which provides you with items for

optimizing this unit for your audio/video system

◆ 8 additional input jacks for discrete multi-channel input

◆ PURE DIRECT for pure fidelity sound with analog and

PCM sources

◆ On-screen display function helpful in controlling this

unit

◆ S-Video signal input/output capability

◆ Component video input/output capability

◆ Video signal conversion (Composite video ↔ S-Video)

capability for monitor out

◆ Optical and coaxial digital audio signal jacks

◆ Sleep timer

◆ Cinema and music night listening modes

◆ Remote control with preset manufacturer codes

◆ Zone 2 custom installation facility (U.S.A., Canada and

Australia models only)

• y indicates a tip for your operation.

• Some operations can be performed by using either the buttons on the main unit or on the remote control. In cases when the button

names differ between the main unit and the remote control, the button name on the remote control is given in parentheses.

• This manual is printed prior to production. Design and specifications are subject to change in part as a result of improvements, etc. In

case of differences between the manual and product, the product has priority.

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.

“Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, “Surround EX”, and the double-D symbol

are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

“SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of YAMAHA

CORPORATION.

“DTS”, “DTS-ES”, “Neo:6” and “DTS 96/24” are trademarks of

Digital Theater Systems, Inc.

FEATURES

00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 2 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM

GETTING STARTED

English

INTRODUCTION

Please check that you received all of the following parts.

1 Press the part and slide the battery

compartment cover off.

Insert four supplied batteries (AAA, R03,

UM-4) according to the polarity markings

(+ and –) on the inside of the battery

compartment.

3 Slide the cover back until it snaps into place.

Notes on batteries

• Change all of the batteries if you notice the following

conditions; the operation range of the remote control decreases,

the indicator does not flash or its light becomes dim.

• Do not use old batteries together with new ones.

• Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline and

manganese batteries) together. Read the packaging carefully as

these different types of batteries may have the same shape and

color.

• If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them immediately. Avoid

touching the leaked material or letting it come into contact with

clothing, etc. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before

installing new batteries.

GETTING STARTED

Supplied accessories

TRANSMITCODE SET

STANDBY

SYSTEM

POWER

MD/CD-R

TUNER

V-AU X

DVD

AMP

POWERPOWER

REC

AUDI O

MUTE

MENUTITLE

VOLUME

DISC SKIP

SET MENU

LEVEL

A/B/C/D/E

FREQ/RDS

EONSTARTMODE PTY SEEK

TEST

ON SCREEN

STRAIGHT

ROCKJAZZHALLSTEREO

4321

ENTER

MOVIETV THTRMUSIC ENTERTAIN

EX/ESNIGHTq/DTS

EFFECT

DISPLAYRETURN

TV MUTE TV INPUT

TV VOL TV CH

AVTV

SELECT

VCR 1 DVR/VCR2

DTV/CBL

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

PRESET/CH

Remote control

Batteries (4)

(AAA, R03, UM-4)

Indoor FM antenna

(U.S.A., Canada, China,

Asia and General models)

AM loop antenna 75-ohm/300-ohm antenna adapter

(U.K. model only)

Indoor FM antenna

(U.K., Europe, Australia

and Korea models)

Optimizer microphone

Installing batteries in the remote

control

If the remote control is without batteries for more than

2 minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the

remote control, the contents of the memory may be

cleared. When the memory is cleared, insert new

batteries, set up the manufacturer code and program

any acquired functions that may have been cleared.

00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 3 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

1 STANDBY/ON

Turns on this unit or sets it to the standby mode. When

you turn on this unit, you will hear a click and there will

be a 4 to 5-second delay before this unit can reproduce

sound.

In standby mode, this unit consumes a small amount of power in

order to receive infrared-signals from the remote control.

2 OPTIMIZER MIC jack

Use to connect and input audio signals from the supplied

microphone for use with the AUTO SETUP function (see

page 25).

3 Remote control sensor

Receives signals from the remote control.

4 Front panel display

Shows information about the operational status of this

unit.

5 A/B/C/D/E (NEXT)

Selects one of the 5 preset station groups (A to E) when

the unit is in tuner mode.

Selects the speaker channel to be adjusted when the unit is

not in tuner mode.

6 PRESET/TUNING l / h (LEVEL –/+)

Selects preset station number 1 to 8 when the colon (:) is

displayed next to the band indication in the front panel

display when the unit is in tuner mode. Selects the tuning

frequency when the colon (:) is not displayed.

Adjusts the level of the speaker channel selected using

A/B/C/D/E (NEXT) when the unit is not in tuner mode.

7 MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM)

Stores a station in the memory. Hold down this button for

more than 3 seconds to start automatic preset tuning.

8 TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO)

Switches the tuning mode between automatic (AUTO

indicator on) and manual (AUTO indicator off).

9 VIDEO AUX jacks

Input audio and video signals from a portable external

source such as a game console. To reproduce source

signals from these jacks, select V-AUX as the input

source.

0 VOLUME

Controls the output level of all audio channels.

This does not affect the REC OUT level.

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

Front panel

AUTO/MAN'L MONO

S VIDEO VIDEO OPTICALL AUDIO R

MAN'L/AUTO FMLEVELNEXTEDIT

EFFECT

MEMORYFM/AMPRESET/TUNING

OPTIMIZER

MIC

A/B/C/D/E

PROGRAM

l PRESET/TUNING h

TUNING MODE

PURE DIRECTINPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT

SPEAKERS

PHONES

SILENT CINEMA

STANDBY

/ON

MULTI CH

INPUT

VOLUME

VIDEO AUX

INPUT

314526 09

KHGEBACDF I

RDS MODE/FREQ EON

MODE

PTY SEEK

START

MNOL

(U.S.A. model)

(U.K. and Europe models only)

Note

00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 4 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

English

INTRODUCTION

A PHONES (SILENT CINEMA) jack

Outputs audio signals for private listening with

headphones. When you connect headphones, no signals

are output to the OUTPUT jacks or to the speakers.

All Dolby Digital and DTS audio signals are mixed down

to the left and right headphone channels.

B SPEAKERS A/B

Turns on or off the set of front speakers connected to the A

and/or B terminals on the rear panel each time the

corresponding button is pressed.

C PRESET/TUNING (EDIT)

Switches the function of PRESET/TUNING l / h

(LEVEL –/+) between selecting preset station numbers

and tuning.

D STRAIGHT (EFFECT)

Switches the sound fields off or on. When STRAIGHT is

selected, input signals (2-channel or multi-channel) are

output directly from their respective speakers without

effect processing.

E FM/AM

Switches the reception band between FM and AM.

F PROGRAM

Use to select sound field programs or adjust the bass/treble

balance (in conjunction with TONE CONTROL).

G TONE CONTROL

Use to adjust the bass/treble balance for the front left and

right, center, presence and subwoofer channels (see

page 31).

H INPUT MODE

Sets the priority (AUTO, DTS, ANALOG) for the type of

signals received when one component is connected to two

or more of this unit’s input jacks (see page 36).

I INPUT selector

Selects the input source you want to listen to or watch.

J MULTI CH INPUT

Selects the source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT

jacks. When selected, the MULTI CH INPUT source takes

priority over the source selected with INPUT (or the input

selector buttons on the remote control).

K PURE DIRECT

Turns on or off PURE DIRECT mode (see page 35).

■ U.K. and Europe models only

L RDS MODE/FREQ

Press this button when the unit is receiving an RDS station

to cycle the display between the PS mode, PTY mode, RT

mode, CT mode (if the station offers those RDS data

services) and/or the frequency display.

M PTY SEEK MODE

Press this button to set the unit to the PTY SEEK mode.

N PTY SEEK START

Press this button to begin searching for a station after the

desired program type has been selected in the PTY SEEK

mode.

O EON

Press this button to select a radio program type (NEWS,

INFO, AFFAIRS, SPORT) to tune in automatically.

00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 5 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

This section describes the function of each control on the

remote control used to control this unit. To operate other

components, see “REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES” on

page 60.

1 Infrared window

Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the

component you want to operate.

2 CODE SET

Use to set up manufacturer codes (see page 61).

3 Input selector buttons

Select the input source and change the control area.

4 Sound field program / numeric buttons (1 - 8)

Use to select sound field programs.

Use numbers 1 through 8 to select preset stations when the

unit is in tuner mode.

5 NIGHT

Turns on or off the night listening modes (see page 35).

6 LEVEL

Selects the speaker channel to be adjusted and sets the

level.

7 Cursor buttons u / d / j / i / SELECT

Use to select and adjust sound field program parameters or

SET MENU items.

Press u / d to select preset station numbers when the unit

is in tuner mode.

8 TEST (RETURN)

Outputs the test tone to adjust the speaker levels.

Returns to the previous menu level when adjusting the

SET MENU parameters.

9 TRANSMIT indicator

Flashes while the remote control is sending signals.

0 STANDBY

Sets this unit in the standby mode.

A SYSTEM POWER

Turns on the power of this unit.

B SLEEP

Sets the sleep timer.

C MULTI CH IN

Selects MULTI CH INPUT when using an external

decoder (etc.).

D AMP

Selects the AMP mode. You must select the AMP mode to

control the main unit.

E VOLUME –/+

Increases or decreases the volume level.

F MUTE

Mutes the sound. Press again to restore the audio output to

the previous volume level.

Remote control

TRANSMITCODE SET

STANDBY

SYSTEM

POWER

MD/CD-R

TUNER

V-AUX

DVD

AMP

POWERPOWER

REC

AUDIO

MUTE

MENUTITLE

VOLUME

DISC SKIP

FREQ/RDS

EONSTART

SET MENU

LEVEL

A/B/C/D/E

MODE PTY SEEK

TEST

ON SCREEN

STRAIGHT

ROCKJAZZHALLSTEREO

4321

ENTER

MOVIETV THTRMUSIC ENTERTAIN

EX/ESNIGHTq/DTS

EFFECT

DISPLAYRETURN

TV MUTE TV INPUT

TV VOL TV CH

AVTV

SELECT

VCR 1 DVR/VCR2

DTV/CBL

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

PRESET/CH

00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 6 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

English

INTRODUCTION

G STRAIGHT (EFFECT)

Switches the sound fields off or on. When STRAIGHT is

selected, input signals (2-channel or multi-channel) are

output directly from their respective speakers without

effect processing.

H EX/ES

Switches between 5.1 or 6.1/7.1-channel playback of

multi-channel software.

I SET MENU (A/B/C/D/E)

Activates the SET MENU function.

Selects preset station groups when the unit is in tuner

mode.

J ON SCREEN

Selects the display mode of the on-screen display (OSD)

this unit sends to your video monitor.

■ U.K. and Europe models only

K RDS tuning buttons

FREQ/RDS

Press this button when the unit is receiving an RDS station

to cycle the display between the PS mode, PTY mode, RT

mode, CT mode (if the station offers those RDS data

services) and/or the frequency display.

EON

Press this button to select a radio program type (NEWS,

INFO, AFFAIRS, SPORT) to tune in automatically.

PTY SEEK MODE

Press this button to set the unit to the PTY SEEK mode.

PTY SEEK START

Press this button to begin searching for a station after the

desired program type has been selected in the PTY SEEK

mode.

The remote control transmits a directional infrared beam.

Be sure to aim the remote control directly at the remote

control sensor on the main unit during operation.

■ Handling the remote control

• Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote

control.

• Do not drop the remote control.

• Do not leave or store the remote control in the

following types of conditions:

– high humidity such as near a bath

– high temperature such as near a heater or stove

– extremely low temperatures

– dusty places

Using the remote control

AUTO/MAN'L MONO

S VIDEO VIDEO OPTICALL AUDIO R

MAN'L/AUTO FMLEVELNEXTEDIT

EFFECT

MEMORYFM/AMPRESET/TUNING

OPTIMIZER

MIC

A/B/C/D/E

PROGRAM

l PRESET/TUNING h

TUNING MODE

PURE DIRECTINPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT

SPEAKERS

PHONES

SILENT CINEMA

STANDBY

/ON

MULTI CH

INPUT

VOLUME

VIDEO AUX

INPUT

30 30

TRANSMITCODE SET

STANDBY

SYSTEM

POWER

MD/CD-R

TUNER

V-AUX

DVD

AMP

POWERPOWER

REC

AUDIO

MUTE

MENUTITLE

VOLUME

DISC SKIP

SET MENU

LEVEL

A/B/C/D/E

TEST

STRAIGHT

ROCKJAZZHALLSTEREO

4321

ENTER

MOVIETV THTRMUSICENTERTAIN

EX/ESNIGHTq/DTS

EFFECT

DISPLAYRETURN

TV MUTE TV INPUT

TV VOL TV CH

AVTV

SELECT

VCR

DTV/CBL

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

PRESET/CH

Approximately 6 m (20 ft)

00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 7 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

1 Decoder indicators

When any of this unit’s decoders function, the respective

indicator lights up.

2 SILENT CINEMA indicator

Lights up when headphones are connected and a sound

field program is selected (see page 31).

3 NIGHT indicator

Lights up when you select night listening mode.

4 Input source indicators

A cursor lights to show the current input source.

5 Sound field indicators

Light to indicate the active DSP sound fields.

6 CINEMA DSP indicator

Lights up when you select a CINEMA DSP sound field

program.

7 AUTO indicator

Lights up when this unit is in automatic tuning mode.

8 TUNED indicator

Lights up when this unit is tuned into a station.

9 STEREO indicator

Lights up when this unit is receiving a strong signal for an

FM stereo broadcast while the AUTO indicator is lit.

0 MEMORY indicator

Blinks to show that a station can be stored.

A MUTE indicator

Blinks while the MUTE function is on.

B VOLUME level indication

Indicates the volume level.

C PCM indicator

Lights up when this unit is reproducing PCM (pulse code

modulation) digital audio signals.

D VIRTUAL indicator

Lights up when Virtual CINEMA DSP is active (see

page 36).

E Headphones indicator

Lights up when headphones are connected.

F SP A B indicators

Light up according to the set of front speakers selected.

Both indicators light up when both sets of speakers are

selected.

G SLEEP indicator

Lights up while the sleep timer is on.

H HiFi DSP indicator

Lights up when you select a HiFi DSP sound field

program.

I Multi-information display

Shows the current sound field program name and other

information when adjusting or changing settings.

J OPTIMIZER indicator

Lights up during the auto setup procedure and when the

auto setup speaker settings are used without any

modifications.

Front panel display

CDTUNER

MD/CD-R

DVD

HiFi DSP

DTV/CBL

V-AUXVCR-1

DVR/VCR2

MATRIX DISCRETE

SILENT CINEMA NIGHT

ZONE2

PTY HOLD AUTO

PS RT CT EONPTY

TUNED STEREO MUTE

VOLUME

MEMORY

SLEEP

VIRTUAL

PCM

PL x

A B

96/24

LFE

LCR

SL SB SR

DIGITAL

OPTIMIZER

123456 780AB9

HI L

JMK NEDC

(U.S.A., Canada and

Australia models only)

(U.K. and Europe models only)

Presence DSP sound field

Listening position

Left surround

DSP sound field

Right surround

DSP sound field

Surround back DSP sound field

00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 8 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

English

INTRODUCTION

K 96/24 indicator

Lights up when a DTS 96/24 signal is input to this unit.

L LFE indicator

Lights up when the input signal contains the LFE signal.

M Input channel indicators

Indicate the channel components of the current digital

input signal.

N Presence and surround back speaker

indicators

Indicate the connection of presence and/or surround back

speakers when using the SPEAKER LEVEL setting (see

page 55).

O ZONE 2 indicator

(U.S.A., Canada and Australia models only)

Lights up when Zone 2 power is on.

P RDS indicators

(U.K. and Europe models only)

The name(s) of the RDS data offered by the currently

received RDS station light(s) up.

EON lights up when an RDS station that offers the EON

data service is being received.

PTY HOLD lights up while searching for stations in the

PTY SEEK mode.

00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 9 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

1 DIGITAL INPUT jacks

See pages 16, 18 and 19 for details.

2 Audio component jacks

See page 19 for connection information.

3 Video component jacks

See pages 16 and 18 for connection information.

4 Antenna terminals

See page 21 for connection information.

5 PRESENCE/ZONE 2 speaker terminals

(U.S.A., Canada and Australia models)

PRESENCE speaker terminals

(other models)

See page 13 for connection information.

6 REMOTE IN/OUT jacks

(U.S.A., Canada and Australia models only)

See page 64 for details.

7 CONTROL OUT jack

(U.S.A., Canada and Australia models only)

This is a control expansion terminal for commercial use.

8 AC OUTLET(S)

Use to supply power to your other A/V components (see

page 22).

9 DIGITAL OUTPUT jack

See page 19 for details.

0 MULTI CH INPUT jacks

See page 17 for connection information.

A ZONE 2 OUTPUT jacks

(U.S.A., Canada and Australia models only)

See page 64 for details.

B PRE OUT jacks

See page 20 for connection information.

C Speaker terminals

See page 13 for connection information.

D IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch

See page 23.

< Asia and General models only >

FREQUENCY STEP switch

See page 21.

VOLTAGE SELECTOR

See page 22.

Rear panel

AUDIO AUDIO

DIGITAL

INPUT

DVD

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

DTV/CBL

MD/CD-R

OPTICAL

SUB

WOOFER

SURROUND

BACK

SURROUND

FRONT

OUT

(REC)

(PLAY)

/CD-R

DVD

VIDEO

S VIDEO

MONITOR

OUT

DTV

/CBL

DVD

COMPONENT VIDEO

PR PB Y

75Ω UNBAL.

ANT

ANTGND

TUNER

DTV

/CBL

VCR 1

OUT

DVR/

VCR 2

OUT

CENTER

DIGITAL

OUTPUT

MULTI CH INPUT

ZONE 2

OUT

VIDEO S VIDEO

MONITOR OUT

FRONT

SUB

WOOFER

FRONT

CENTER

PRE OUT

SURROUND

BACK

AC OUTLETS

SWITCHED

SPEAKERS

SURROUND

CENTER SURROUND BACK

IMPEDANCE SELECTOR

PRESENCE

/ZONE 2

OUT

ZONE 2

REMOTE

CONTROL

OUT

+12V

15mA MAX.

12 3 47865

90 A B C D

(U.S.A. model)

00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 10 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM

SPEAKER SETUP

English

PREPARATION

The speaker layout below shows the standard ITU-R

speaker setting. You can use it to enjoy CINEMA DSP and

multi-channel audio sources.

Front speakers (FR and FL)

The front speakers are used for the main source sound plus

effect sounds. Place these speakers an equal distance from

the ideal listening position. The distance of each speaker

from each side of the video monitor should be the same.

Center speaker (C)

The center speaker is for the center channel sounds

(dialog, vocals, etc.). If for some reason it is not practical

to use a center speaker, you can do without it. Best results,

however, are obtained with the full system. Align the front

face of the center speaker with the front face of your video

monitor. Place the speaker centrally between the front

speakers and as close to the monitor as possible, such as

directly over or under it.

Surround speakers (SR and SL)

The surround speakers are used for effect and surround

sounds. Place these speakers behind your listening

position, facing slightly inwards, about 1.8 m (6 ft) above

the floor.

Surround back speakers (SBR and SBL)

The surround back speakers supplement the surround

speakers and provide for more realistic front-to-back

transitions. Place these speakers directly behind the

listening position and at the same height as the surround

speakers. They should be positioned at least 30 cm (12 in)

apart. Ideally, they should be positioned at the same width

as the front speakers.

Subwoofer

The use of a subwoofer, such as the YAMAHA Active

Servo Processing Subwoofer System, is effective not only

for reinforcing bass frequencies from any or all channels,

but also for high fidelity reproduction of the LFE (low-

frequency effect) channel included in Dolby Digital and

DTS software. The position of the subwoofer is not so

critical, because low bass sounds are not highly

directional. But it is better to place the subwoofer near the

front speakers. Turn it slightly toward the center of the

room to reduce wall reflections.

Presence speakers (PR and PL)

Presence speakers supplement the sound from the front

speakers with extra ambient effects produced by CINEMA

DSP (see page 44). These effects include sounds that

filmmakers intend to locate a little farther back behind the

screen in order to create more theater-like ambience. Place

these speakers at the front of the room about 0.5 - 1 m

(1 - 3 ft) outside the front speakers, facing slightly

inwards, and about 1.8 m (6 ft) above the floor.

SPEAKER SETUP

Speaker placement

60˚

30˚

SBR

SBL

80˚

more than 30 cm (12 in)

1.8 m (6 ft)

00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 11 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM

SPEAKER SETUP

Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel (R),

“+” (red) and “–” (black) properly. If the connections are

faulty, no sound will be heard from the speakers, and if the

polarity of the speaker connections is incorrect, the sound

will be unnatural and lack bass.

• If you will use 6 ohm speakers, be sure to set

this unit’s speaker impedance setting to 6

ohms before using (see page 23).

• Before connecting the speakers, make sure that the

power of this unit is off.

• Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other or do

not let them touch any metal part of this unit. This

could damage this unit and/or speakers.

• Use magnetically shielded speakers. If this type of

speakers still creates the interference with the monitor,

place the speakers away from the monitor.

A speaker cord is actually a pair of insulated cables

running side by side. One cable is colored or shaped

differently, perhaps with a stripe, groove or ridges.

Connect the striped (grooved, etc.) cable to the “+” (red)

terminals on this unit and your speaker. Connect the plain

cable to the “–” (black) terminals.

1 Remove approximately 10 mm (3/8") of

insulation from the end of each speaker

cable.

2 Twist the exposed wires of the cable together

to prevent short circuits.

3 Unscrew the knob.

4 Insert one bare wire into the hole in the side

of each terminal.

5 Tighten the knob to secure the wire.

■ Connecting to PRESENCE/ZONE 2 or

PRESENCE speaker terminals

1 Open the tab.

2 Insert one bare wire into the hole of each

terminal.

3 Return the tab to secure the wire.

■ Banana plug connections

(With the exception of U.K., Europe and Asia models)

First, tighten the knob and then insert the banana plug

connector into the end of the corresponding terminal.

You can also use banana plugs with the PRESENCE/ZONE 2 and

PRESENCE speaker terminals. Open the tab, then insert one

banana plug connector into the hole of each terminal. Do not

attempt to close the tabs after connecting the banana plugs.

Speaker connections

CAUTION

10 mm (3/8")

Red: positive (+)

Black: negative (–)

Banana plug

(With the exception of U.K., Europe

and Asia models)

00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 12 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM

English

SPEAKER SETUP

PREPARATION

FRONT

SUB

WOOFER

FRONT

CENTER

PRE OUT

SURROUND

BACK

SPEAKERS

SURROUND

CENTER SURROUND BACK

PRESENCE

/ZONE 2

6 7 10

2 3 4 5

Subwoofer

system

Center

speaker

Front speakers (A)

Surround back

speakers

LeftRight

Surround speakers

Front

speakers

(B)

(U.S.A. model)

LeftRight

Presence speakers

You can connect both surround back and presence speakers to this unit, but they do not output sound simultaneously.

• The surround back speakers output the surround back channel included in Dolby Digital EX and DTS-ES software and only

operate when the Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES decoder is turned on.

• The presence speakers output ambient effects created by the DSP sound fields. They do not output sound when other sound fields

are selected.

00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 13 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM

SPEAKER SETUP

■ FRONT terminals

Connect one or two speaker systems to these terminals. If

you use only one speaker system, connect it to either the

FRONT A or B terminals.

The Canada model cannot output to two separate speaker systems

simultaneously.

■ CENTER terminals

Connect a center speaker to these terminals.

■ SURROUND terminals

Connect surround speakers to these terminals.

■ SUB WOOFER jack

Connect a subwoofer with built-in amplifier, such as the

YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System,

to this jack.

■ SURROUND BACK terminals

Connect surround back speakers to these terminals. If you

only connect one surround back speaker, connect it to the

left (L) terminals.

■ PRESENCE terminals

Connect presence speakers to these terminals.

If you are using either the U.S.A., Canada or Australia model,

you can also use these speakers as Zone 2 speakers (see

page 59).

Note

Speaker layout

00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 14 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM

CONNECTIONS

English

PREPARATION

Do not connect this unit or other components to the mains

power until all connections between components are

complete.

■ Cable indications

■ Analog jacks

You can input analog signals from audio components by

connecting audio pin cable to the analog jacks on this unit.

Connect red plugs to the right jacks and white plugs to the

left jacks.

■ Digital jacks

This unit has digital jacks for direct transmission of digital

signals through either coaxial or fiber optic cables. You

can use the digital jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital and

DTS bitstreams. When you connect components to both

the COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to

the input signals from the COAXIAL jack. All digital

input jacks are compatible with 96-kHz sampling digital

signals.

This unit handles digital and analog signals independently. Thus

audio signals input to the analog jacks are only output to the

analog OUT (REC) jacks. Likewise audio signals input to the

digital (OPTICAL or COAXIAL) jacks are only output to the

DIGITAL OUTPUT jack.

Dust protection cap

Pull out the cap from the optical jack before you connect

the fiber optic cable. Do not discard the cap. When you are

not using the optical jack, be sure to put the cap back in

place. This cap protects the jack from dust.

■ Video jacks

This unit has three types of video jacks. Connection

depends on the availability of input jacks on your monitor.

The signals input through the S VIDEO jacks on this unit

are automatically converted for output through the VIDEO

jacks. When V CONV. is set to ON (see page 58), signals

input through the VIDEO jacks can be output through the

S VIDEO jacks.

VIDEO jack

For conventional composite video signals.

S VIDEO jack

For S-Video signals, separated into luminance (Y) and

color (C) video signals to achieve high-quality color

reproduction.

COMPONENT VIDEO jacks

For component signals, separated into luminance (Y) and

color difference (PB, PR) to provide the best quality in

picture reproduction.

When signals are input through both the S VIDEO and VIDEO

jacks, signals input through the S VIDEO jack have priority.

CONNECTIONS

Before connecting components

Note

CAUTION

left analog cables

right analog cables

optical cables

coaxial cables

video cables

S-Video cables

For analog signals

For digital signals

For video signals

Note

VIDEO

S VIDEO

COMPONENT VIDEO

S VIDEO

VIDEO

COMPONENT

VIDEO

Signal flow inside this unit

Only when V CONV. is set to ON

(see page 58).

Output

(MONITOR OUT)

Input

00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 15 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM

CONNECTIONS

■ Connections for DVD playback

Connecting video components

AUDIO

DVD

COAXIAL

DVD

VIDEO

S VIDEO

MONITOR

OUT

DVD

COMPONENT VIDEO

PR PB Y

VIDEO S VIDEO

MONITOR OUT

DIGITAL

INPUT

LRC

DVD player

Video

monitor

(U.S.A. model)

Optical out

Video out

Audio out

Video in

Coaxial out

00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 16 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM

English

CONNECTIONS

PREPARATION

■ Connecting to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks

This unit is equipped with 8 additional input jacks (left and right FRONT, CENTER, left and right SURROUND, left and

right SURROUND BACK and SUB WOOFER) for discrete multi-channel input from a multi-format player, external

decoder, sound processor or pre-amplifier.

Connect the output jacks on your multi-format player or external decoder to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. Be sure to

match the left and right outputs to the left and right input jacks for the front and surround channels.

• When you select MULTI CH INPUT as the input source, this unit automatically turns off the digital sound field processor, and you

cannot select sound field programs.

• This unit does not redirect signals input to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to accommodate for missing speakers. We recommend that

you connect at least a 5.1-channel speaker system before using this feature.

• When headphones are used, only front left and right channels are output.

Notes

SUB

WOOFER

SURROUND

FRONT

CENTER

MULTI CH INPUT

LRLR

SUB

WOOFER

SURROUND

BACK

SURROUND

FRONT

CENTER

MULTI CH INPUT

LR LRLR

Multi-format player/

External decoder

For 6-channel input

Front

out

Surround

out

Subwoofer

out

Center

out

Multi-format player/

External decoder

Front

out

Surround

out

Subwoofer

out

Center

out

Surround

back out

For 8-channel input

(U.S.A. model)

00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 17 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM

CONNECTIONS

■ Connections for other video components

■ VIDEO AUX jacks (on the front panel)

Use these jacks to connect any video source, such as a

game console or video camera, to this unit.

AUDIO

DIGITAL

INPUT

DVD

OPTICAL

DTV/CBL

VIDEO

S VIDEO

DTV

/CBL

COMPONENT VIDEO

PR PB Y

DTV

/CBL

VCR 1

OUT

LR LR

Cable TV or

satellite tuner

DVD recorder

or VCR

Audio out

Video out

Optical out

Audio out Video out

Video in

Audio in

(U.S.A. model)

VIDEOS VIDEO OPTICALL AUDIO R

VIDEO AUX

Game

console or

video

camera

Video out

Audio out L

Audio out R

Optical out

S-Video out

00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 18 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM

English

CONNECTIONS

PREPARATION

■ Connections for audio components

Connecting audio components

AUDIO

DIGITAL

INPUT

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

MD/CD-R

OPTICAL

OUT

(REC)

(PLAY)

/CD-R

DIGITAL

OUTPUT

CD player

MD recorder or

tape deck

(U.S.A. model)

Coaxial out

Audio out

Audio in

Optical in

Audio out

Optical out

00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 19 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM

CONNECTIONS

■ Connecting to an external amplifier

If you want to increase the power output to the speakers,

or want to use another amplifier, connect an external

amplifier to the PRE OUT jacks as follows.

• When audio pin plugs are connected to the PRE OUT jacks for

output to an external amplifier, do not make connections to the

corresponding SPEAKERS terminals. Set the volume of the

amplifier connected to this unit to the maximum.

• The signals output through the FRONT PRE OUT and

CENTER PRE OUT jacks are affected by the TONE

CONTROL settings.

• If SPEAKERS A is turned off and SP B is set to ZONE B (see

page 59), signals will only be output from the FRONT PRE

OUT jacks.

1 FRONT PRE OUT jacks

Front channel line output jacks.

2 SURROUND PRE OUT jacks

Surround channel line output jacks.

3 CENTER PRE OUT jack

Center channel line output jack.

4 SURROUND BACK PRE OUT jacks

Surround back or presence channel line output jacks.

5 SUB WOOFER PRE OUT jack

Connect a subwoofer with built-in amplifier, such as the

YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System,

to this jack.

• Each PRE OUT jack outputs the same channel signals as the

corresponding speaker terminals.

• Adjust the volume level of the subwoofer with the control on

the subwoofer. It is also possible to adjust the volume level

using the remote control (see “Manually adjusting speaker

levels” on page 49).

• Some signals may not be output from the SUB WOOFER PRE

OUT jack depending on the SPEAKER SET (see page 53) and

LFE/BASS OUT (see page 54) settings.

Notes

CENTER

SUB

WOOFER

SURROUND

PRE OUT

FRONT

SURROUND

BACK

123

00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 20 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM

English

CONNECTIONS

PREPARATION

Both AM and FM indoor antennas are included with this

unit. In general, these antennas should provide sufficient

signal strength. Connect each antenna correctly to the

designated terminals.

■ Connecting the AM loop antenna

1 Set up the AM loop antenna, then connect it

to the terminals on this unit.

2 Press and hold the tab to

insert the AM loop antenna

lead wires into the AM ANT

and GND terminals.

3 Orient the AM loop antenna

for the best reception.

• The AM loop antenna should be placed away from this unit.

• The AM loop antenna should always be connected, even if an

outdoor AM antenna is connected to this unit.

• A properly installed outdoor antenna provides clearer reception

than an indoor one. If you experience poor reception quality, an

outdoor antenna may improve the quality. Consult the nearest

authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center about outdoor

antennas.

■ 75-ohm/300-ohm antenna adapter

(U.K. model only)

1 Open the cover of the

included 75-ohm/300-ohm

antenna adapter.

2 Cut the external sleeve

of the 75-ohm coaxial

cable and prepare it for

connection.

3 Cut the lead wire and

remove it.

4 Insert the cable

wire into the slot,

and clamp it with

pliers.

5 Snap the cover

into place.

■ FREQUENCY STEP switch

(Asia and General models only)

Because the interstation frequency

spacing differs in different areas, set

the FREQUENCY STEP switch

(locating on the rear panel) according

to the frequency spacing in your area.

• North, Central and South America: 100 kHz/10 kHz

• Other areas: 50 kHz/9 kHz

Before setting this switch, disconnect this unit’s power

cord from the AC wall outlet.

Connecting the antennas

Ω

UNBAL.

ANT

ANTGND

TUNER

AM loop antenna

(included)

Ground (GND terminal)

For maximum safety and minimum

interference, connect the antenna

GND

terminal to a good earth ground. A good

earth ground is a metal stake driven into

moist earth.

Indoor FM antenna

(included)

Notes

11 (7/16)

8 (5/16)

6 (1/14)

Unit:

mm (in)

Lead wire

Clamp

Insert wire

into slot.

FREQUENCY STEP

/ 100

/ 50

FMAM

00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 21 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM

CONNECTIONS

■ Connecting the AC power cord

Plug the power cord into an AC wall outlet.

■ AC OUTLET(S) (SWITCHED)

U.K. and Australia models ............................. 1 OUTLET

Korea model ............................................................. None

Other models ................................................ 2 OUTLETS

Use these outlets to connect the power cords from your

other components to this unit. Power to the AC

OUTLET(S) is controlled by this unit’s STANDBY/ON

(or SYSTEM POWER and STANDBY). The outlet(s)

supply power to any connected component whenever this

unit is turned on. The maximum power (total power

consumption of components) that can be connected to the

AC OUTLET(S) is:

China, Asia and General models .............................. 50 W

Korea model ............................................................... N/A

Other models ...........................................................100 W

■ VOLTAGE SELECTOR

(Asia and General models only)

The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit

must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging

into the AC main supply. Voltages are:

Asia model ......................... 220/230-240 V AC, 50/60 Hz

General model ..... 110/120/220/230-240 V AC, 50/60 Hz

■ Memory back-up

The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from

being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode.

However if the power cord is disconnected from the AC

wall outlet, or the power supply is cut for more than one

week, the stored data will be lost.

Connecting the power supply cord

VOLTAGE

SELECTOR

VOLTAGE SELECTOR

(Asia and General models)

00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 22 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM

English

CONNECTIONS

PREPARATION

■ IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch

Do not change the setting of the IMPEDANCE

SELECTOR switch when the unit power is switched on,

as doing so may damage the unit.

If this unit fails to turn on when STANDBY/ON is pressed

on either the front panel or remote control, the

IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch may not be fully slid to

either position. If this is the case, slide the switch all the

way to either position when this unit is in standby mode.

Select the switch position (left or right) according to the

impedance of the speakers in your system.

The Canada model cannot use two separate speaker systems (A and B) simultaneously when the switch is set to the right position.

CAUTION

SET BEFORE POWER ON

IMPEDANCE SELECTOR

IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch

(U.S.A. model)

Switch position Speaker Impedance level

Left

Front

If you use one set (A or B), the impedance of each speaker must be

4 Ω or higher.

If you use two sets (A and B), the impedance of each speaker must be

8 Ω or higher.

The impedance of each speaker must be 6 Ω or higher.

Center, Surround, Surround back,

Presence

Right

Front

If you use one set (A or B), the impedance of each speaker must be

8 Ω or higher.

If you use two sets (A and B), the impedance of each speaker must be

16 Ω or higher.

The impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher.

Center, Surround, Surround back,

Presence

00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 23 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM

CONNECTIONS

When all connections are complete, turn on the power of

this unit.

1 Press STANDBY/ON (SYSTEM POWER on the

remote control) to turn on the power of this

unit.

2 Turn on the video monitor connected to this

unit.

Turning on the power

AUTO/MAN'L MONO

S VIDEO VIDEO OPTICALL AUDIO R

MAN'L/AUTO FMLEVELNEXTEDIT

EFFECT

MEMORYFM/AMPRESET/TUNING

OPTIMIZER

MIC

A/B/C/D/E

PROGRAM

l PRESET/TUNING h

TUNING MODE

PURE DIRECTINPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT

SPEAKERS

PHONES

SILENT CINEMA

STANDBY

/ON

MULTI CH

INPUT

VOLUME

VIDEO AUX

INPUT

TRANSMITCODE SET

STANDBY

SYSTEM

POWER

MD/CD-R

TUNER

V-AU X

DVD

AMP

POWERPOWER

VOLUME

TV MUTE TV INPUT

TV VOL TV CH

AVTV

VCR 1 DVR/VCR2

DTV/CBL

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

(U.S.A. model)

STANDBY

/ON

SYSTEM

POWER

Front panel

Remote control

00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 24 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM

AUTO SETUP

English

PREPARATION

This receiver employs YAMAHA Parametric Room

Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) technology which lets you

avoid troublesome listening-based speaker setup and

achieves highly accurate sound adjustments. The supplied

optimizer microphone collects and analyzes the sound

your speakers produce in your actual listening

environment.

• Please be advised that it is normal for loud test tones to be

output during the auto setup procedure.

• If auto setup stops and error messages appear on the screen,

follow the troubleshooting on page 29.

YPAO performs the following checks and makes

appropriate adjustments to give you the best possible

sound from your system.

WIRING/LEVEL:

Checks which speakers are connected and the polarity of

each speaker. Also checks and adjusts the sound level

(volume) of each speaker so that the sound level of each

speaker is the same when heard from the listening

position.

DISTANCE/PHASE:

Checks the distance of each speaker from the listening

position and adjusts the delay of each channel so that the

sound from each speaker reaches the listening position at

the same time. Also checks the phase of each speaker.

SIZE:

Checks the speakers frequency response and sets the

crossover/high cut frequency for the subwoofer to improve

the sound relationship between the speakers and the

subwoofer.

1 Connect the supplied optimizer microphone

to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front

panel.

• After you have completed the auto setup procedure, be sure to

disconnect the optimizer microphone.

• The optimizer microphone is sensitive to heat.

– Keep it away from direct sunlight.

– Do not place it on top of this unit.

2 Place the optimizer microphone on a flat

level surface with the omni-directional

microphone head upward, at your normal

listening position.

If possible, use a tripod (etc.) to affix the optimizer

mic at the same height as your ears would be when

you are seated in your listening position.

AUTO SETUP

Introduction

Notes

Optimizer microphone setup

Notes

AMAN'L/AUTO FMLEVELNEXTEDIT

EFFECT

MEMORYFM/AMPRESET/TUNING

OPTIMIZER

MIC

A/B/C/D/E

PROGRAM

l PRESET/TUNING h

INPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT

SPEAKERS

PHONES

SILENT CINEMA

INPUT

(U.S.A. model)

Optimizer microphone position

00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 25 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM

AUTO SETUP

For best results, make sure the room is as quiet as possible

during the auto setup procedure (YPAO). If there is too

much ambient noise, the results may not be satisfactory.

If your subwoofer has adjustable volume and crossover/high cut

frequency controls, set the volume between 9 and 11 o’clock (as

viewed on a conventional clockface) and set the crossover/high

cut frequency to the maximum.

1 Switch on this unit and your video monitor.

Make sure the OSD is displayed.

2 Press AMP.

3 Press SET MENU.

4 Press u / d to select AUTO SETUP.

5 Press SELECT to enter AUTO SETUP.

6 Press u / d to select SETUP, then press j / i

to select the desired setting.

AUTO To perform the auto setup procedure

(YPAO).

RELOAD To reload the last auto setup (YPAO)

settings to override any manual

changes.

UNDO To undo the last auto setup (YPAO) and

restore the previous settings.

DEFAULT To restore the factory preset (default)

setup parameters.

You can choose RELOAD or UNDO only if you have

already performed auto setup.

7 Press d to select START, then press SELECT

to start the setup procedure.

• If you selected AUTO in step 6, loud test tones will

be output from each speaker in turn; WAIT appears

during the auto setup procedure.

• If you selected DEFAULT, RELOAD or UNDO in

step 6, no test tones are output.

The RESULT:WIRING screen appears after all items

have been measured and set.

• If an ERROR screen appears, see “If an error

screen appears” on page 27.

• If a WARNING screen appears, see “If a warning

screen appears” on page 28.

Starting the setup

VOLUME

MIN

MAX

CROSSOVER/

HIGH CUT

MIN

MAX

Subwoofer

AMP

SET MENU

A/B/C/D/E

SELECT

PRESET/CH

SET MENU

.;AUTOSETUP

;MANUALSETUP

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[SELECT]:Enter

SELECT

PRESET/CH

1 AUTO:MENU

. SETUP;;;;;;;AUTO

START



Automatic

processing

of all items

[ ]/[ ]:Up/Down

[<]/[>]:Select

1 AUTO:MENU

SETUP;;;;;;;AUTO

.START



Automatic

processing

of all items

[]/[]:Up/Down

[SELECT]:Start



FRONT



L;;;;;;;OK



[<]/[>]:Select



[SELECT]:Return

RESULT:WIRING

00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 26 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM

English

AUTO SETUP

PREPARATION

8 Use the cursor buttons to display the results.

• Press u / d to display information about

individual results.

• Press j / i to switch between each result list.

9 When finished, press SELECT.

The RESULT:EXIT screen appears.

10 Press u / d to select SET or CANCEL.

SET To apply the auto setup (YPAO)

settings.

CANCEL To cancel the auto setup (YPAO)

without making any changes.

11 Press SELECT to set or cancel the auto

setup settings.

If you are not satisfied with the result or want to manually adjust

each setup parameter, use the manual setup parameters (see

page 51).

• If E-10 appears during testing, restart the procedure from step 3.

• To cancel the auto setup procedure before completion, press

SET MENU.

■ If an error screen appears

1 Press SELECT to display detailed

information about the error.

2 Press j / i to switch between error

messages.

For details about each message, see page 29.

3 When finished, press SELECT to return to

the main error screen.

4 Press u / d to select RETRY or EXIT, then

press SELECT.

RETRY To retry the auto setup procedure.

EXIT To exit auto setup.

Notes



FRONT



L;;;;;;;OK



[<]/[>]:Select



[SELECT]:Return

RESULT:WIRING

RESULT:EXIT

NOWARNING

RESULTLIST



.)SETCANCEL

[]/[]:Up/Down

[SELECT]:Enter

ERROR

.E-5:NOISY

)RETRYEXIT

[]/[]:Up/Down

[SELECT]:Enter

ERROR: E-5



<



NOISY





Keep



SILENT



[SELECT]:Return

ERROR



E-5:NOISY

.)RETRY



EXIT



[



]/[



]:Up/Down



[SELECT]:Enter

00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 27 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM

AUTO SETUP

■ If a warning screen appears

1 Press j / i to display detailed information

about each warning.

For details about each message, see page 29.

Warnings let you know about potential problems detected

during auto setup. Warnings will not cancel the auto setup.

2 When you are finished, press SELECT.

The RESULT:EXIT screen appears.

3 Press u / d to select RESULT LIST, then

press SELECT.

The RESULT:WIRING screen appears.

Continue from step 8 on page 27 to display

each result.

• If you change speakers, speaker positions, or the layout of your

listening environment, perform auto setup again to re-calibrate

your system.

• If SWFR PHASE:REV appears in RESULT:WIRING, the SET

MENU “SUBWOOFER PHASE” parameter is automatically

set to REVERSE (see page 55).

• In the DISTANCE results, the distance displayed may be longer

than the actual distance depending on the characteristics of your

subwoofer.

Notes

WARNING:W-1

<OUTOFPHASE>

ReverseChannel

FLFR

--

----

[<]/[>]:Select

[SELECT]:Return

RESULT:EXIT

WARNINGLIST

.RESULTLIST

)SETCANCEL

[]/[]:Up/Down

[SELECT]:Enter



FRONT



L;;;;;;;OK



[<]/[>]:Select



[SELECT]:Return

RESULT:WIRING

00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 28 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM

English

AUTO SETUP

PREPARATION

■ Troubleshooting for auto setup procedure

Before auto setup

Errors during auto setup

Press SELECT to display detailed information about individual errors. Press j / i to switch between error messages.

Warnings after auto setup

Press j / i to display detailed information about individual warnings.

• If the ERROR or WARNING screens appears, check the cause of the problem, then perform the auto setup procedure again.

• If warning W-1 appears, corrections are made, but they may not be optimal.

• If warning W-2 or W-3 appears, no corrections are made.

• If error E-10 occurs repeatedly, please contact a qualified YAMAHA service center.

Error message Cause Remedy

Connect MIC!

Optimizer microphone is not connected. • Connect the supplied optimizer microphone to the

OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front panel.

Unplug HP!

Headphones are connected. • Unplug the headphones.

Error message Cause Remedy

E-1:NO FRONT SP

Front L/R channel signal(s) is (are) not

detected.

• Select the front speakers with SPEAKER A or B.

• Check the front left and right speaker connections.

E-2:NO SURR.SP

A surround channel signal is not detected. • Check the surround speaker connections.

E-3:NO PRES. SP

A presence channel signal is not detected. • Check the presence speaker connections.

E-4:SBR->SBL

Only right surround back channel signal is

detected.

• Connect the surround back speaker to the LEFT

SURROUND BACK SPEAKERS terminal if you

only have one surround back speaker.

E-5:NOISY

Background noise is too loud. • Try the auto setup procedure in a quiet environment.

• Turn off noisy electric equipment like air conditioners

(etc.) or move them away from the optimizer

microphone.

E-6:CHECK SURR.

Surround back speaker(s) is (are) connected,

though surround L/R speakers are not.

• Connect surround speakers when you use (a)

surround back speaker(s).

E-7:NO MIC

The optimizer microphone was unplugged

during the auto setup procedure.

• Do not touch the optimizer microphone during the

auto setup procedure.

E-8:NO SIGNAL

The optimizer microphone does not detect test

tones.

• Check the microphone setting.

• Check the speaker connections and placement.

E-9:USER CANCEL

The auto setup procedure was cancelled due to

user activity.

• Perform the auto setup procedure again. Do not adjust

VOLUME (etc.) during the auto setup procedure.

E-10:OTHER ERROR

A DSP communication error or hangup

occurred.

• Perform the auto setup procedure again.

Warning message Cause Remedy

W-1:OUT OF PHASE

Speaker polarity is not correct. This message

may appear depending on the speakers even

when the speakers are connected correctly.

• Check the speaker connections for proper polarity

(+ or –).

W-2:OVER 24m

(80ft)

The distance between the speaker and the

listening position is over 24 m (80 ft).

• Bring the speaker closer to the listening position.

W-3:LEVEL ERROR

The difference of volume level among speakers

is excessive. (No level correction is made.)

• Readjust the speaker installation so that all speakers

are set in locations with similar conditions.

• Check the speaker connections.

• Use speakers of similar quality and efficiency.

• Adjust the output volume of the subwoofer.

00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 29 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM

PLAYBACK

1 Press STANDBY/ON (SYSTEM POWER on the

remote control) to turn on the power.

2 Turn on the video monitor connected to this

unit.

3 Press SPEAKERS A or B on the front panel.

Each press turns the respective speakers on or off.

4 Select the input source.

Use INPUT (or press one of the input selector buttons

on the remote control) to select the input you desire.

The current input source name and input mode appear

in the front panel display and video monitor for a few

seconds.

5 Start playback or select a broadcast station

on the source component.

Refer to the operating instructions for the component.

6 Adjust the volume to the desired output level.

PLAYBACK

Basic operations

AUTO/MAN'L MONO

S VIDEO VIDEO OPTICALL AUDIO R

MAN'L/AUTO FMLEVELNEXTEDIT

EFFECT

MEMORYFM/AMPRESET/TUNING

OPTIMIZER

MIC

A/B/C/D/E

PROGRAM

PRESET/TUNING

TUNING MODE

PURE DIRECTINPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT

SPEAKERS

PHONES

SILENT CINEMA

STANDBY

/ON

MULTI CH

INPUT

VOLUME

VIDEO AUX

INPUT

1 7 43 6

TRANSMITCODE SET

STANDBY

SYSTEM

POWER

MD/CD-R

TUNER

V-AU X

DVD

AMP

POWERPOWER

VOLUME

TV VOL TV CH

AVTV

VCR 1 DVR/VCR2

DTV/CBL

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

MUTE

VOLUME

STRAIGHT

ROCKJAZZHALLSTEREO

4321

ENTER

MOVIETV THTRMUSIC ENTERTAIN

EX/ESNIGHT

/DTS

EFFECT

TV MUTE TV INPUT

TV VOL TV CH

PRESET/CH

(U.S.A. model)

STANDBY

/ON

SYSTEM

POWER

Front panel Remote control

SPEAKERS

INPUT

MD/CD-R

TUNER

V-AUX

DVD

AMP

VCR 1 DVR/VCR2

DTV/CBL

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

Front panel

Remote control

CDTUNER

MD/CD-R

DVD

HiFi DSP

DTV/CBL

V-AUXVCR-1

DVR/VCR2

MATRIX DISCRETE

SILENT CINEMA NIGHT

ZONE2

PTY HOLD AUTO

PS RT CT EONPTY

TUNED STEREO MUTE

VOLUME

MEMORY

SLEEP

VIRTUAL

PCM

PL x

A B

96/24

LFE

L C R

SL SB SR

DIGITAL

01DDVD D AUTOO00

Selected input source

Input mode

VOLUME

Remote control

Front panel

00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 30 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM

English

PLAYBACK

BASIC

OPERATION

7 Select a sound field program if desired.

Use PROGRAM (or press AMP to select the AMP

mode, then press one of the sound field program

buttons repeatedly) to select a sound field program.

See page 44 for details about sound field programs.

To listen with headphones (SILENT CINEMA)

“SILENT CINEMA” allows you to enjoy multi-channel

music or movie sound, including Dolby Digital and DTS

surround, through ordinary headphones. “SILENT

CINEMA” activates automatically whenever you connect

headphones to the PHONES jack while listening to

CINEMA DSP or HiFi DSP sound field programs. When

activated, the “SILENT CINEMA” indicator lights up in

the front panel display.

• This unit will not be set to “SILENT CINEMA” when MULTI

CH INPUT is selected as the input source.

• “SILENT CINEMA” is not effective when PURE DIRECT or

2ch Stereo is selected, or in STRAIGHT mode.

To adjust the tone

You can adjust the tonal quality

of your front left and right,

center, presence and subwoofer

speakers or headphones (when

connected).

Press TONE CONTROL on the

front panel repeatedly to select

TREBLE or BASS, then rotate

PROGRAM to the right or left to

increase or decrease.

• Select TREBLE to adjust the

high frequency response.

• Select BASS to adjust the low frequency response.

To cancel the tone control, press TONE CONTROL

repeatedly to select BYPASS.

Speaker and headphone adjustments are stored independently.

TONE CONTROL is not effective during playback in the PURE

DIRECT mode, or when MULTI CH INPUT is selected

(page 35).

To mute the sound

Press MUTE on the remote control.

The MUTE indicator blinks in the

front panel display.

To resume the audio output, press

MUTE again (or press

VOLUME –/+). The MUTE

indicator disappears from the display.

You can adjust the muting level (see page 56).

Notes

PROGRAM

STRAIGHT

ROCKJAZZHALLSTEREO

4321

ENTER

MOVIETV THTRMUSIC ENTERTAIN

EX/ESNIGHTq/DTS

EFFECT

AMP

Remote control

Front panel

Note

TONE CONTROL

PROGRAM

MUTE

00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 31 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM

PLAYBACK

■ Selecting MULTI CH INPUT

Press MULTI CH INPUT so that “MULTI CH INPUT”

appears in the front panel display and video monitor.

MULTI CH INPUT

When “MULTI CH INPUT” is shown in the front panel display,

no other source can be played. To select another input source with

INPUT (or one of the input selector buttons), press MULTI CH

INPUT to turn off “MULTI CH INPUT” in the front panel

display.

■ Playing video sources in the

background

You can combine a video image from a video source with

sound from an audio source. For example, you can enjoy

listening to classical music while viewing beautiful

scenery from the video source on the video monitor.

Use the input selector buttons on the remote

control to select a video source, then select an

audio source.

If you want to enjoy audio from the MULTI CH INPUT jacks

together with a video source, first select the video source, then

press MULTI CH INPUT.

■ Front panel operation

Rotate PROGRAM to select the desired program.

The name of the selected program appears in the front

panel display and video monitor.

Note

MULTI CH

INPUT

MULTI CH IN

Front panel

Remote control

MD/CD-R

TUNER

V-AUX

DVD

AMP

VCR 1 DVR/VCR1

DTV/CBL

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

Audio sources

Video sources

Selecting sound field programs

AUTO/MAN'L MONO

S VIDEO VIDEO OPTICALL AUDIO R

MAN'L/AUTO FMLEVELNEXT

EDIT

EFFECT

MEMORYFM/AMPRESET/TUNING

OPTIMIZER

MIC

A/B/C/D/E

PROGRAM

l PRESET/TUNING h

TUNING MODE

PURE DIRECTINPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT

SPEAKERS

PHONES

SILENT CINEMA

STANDBY

/ON

MULTI CH

INPUT

VOLUME

VIDEO AUX

INPUT

PROGRAM

(U.S.A. model)

CDTUNER

MD/CD-R

DVD

HiFi DSP

DTV/CBL

V-AUXVCR-1

DVR/VCR2

MATRIX DISCRETE

SILENT CINEMA NIGHT

ZONE2

PTY HOLD AUTO

PS RT CT EONPTY

TUNED STEREO MUTE

VOLUME

MEMORY

SLEEP

VIRTUAL

PCM

PL x

A B

96/24

LFE

L C R

SL SB SR

DIGITAL

01DJAZZA CLUBO00

Program name

PROGRAM

00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 32 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM

English

PLAYBACK

BASIC

OPERATION

■ Remote control operation

Press AMP to select the AMP mode, then press

one of the sound field program buttons

repeatedly to select the desired program.

The name of the selected program appears in the front

panel display.

Choose a sound field program based on your listening preference,

and not on the name of the program.

• When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects

the last sound field program used with that source.

• Sound field programs cannot be selected when MULTI CH

INPUT is selected.

• Sampling frequencies higher than 48 kHz (except for DTS 96/

24 signals) will be sampled down to 48 kHz, then sound field

programs will be applied.

■ Enjoying multi-channel software

If you connected a surround back speaker, use this feature

to enjoy 6.1/7.1-channel playback for multi-channel

sources using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx, Dolby Digital

Surround EX or DTS-ES decoders.

Press AMP to select the AMP mode, then press

EX/ES on the remote control to switch between

5.1 and 6.1/7.1-channel playback.

To select a decoder, press j / i repeatedly when

PLIIxMusic (etc.) is displayed.

AUTO (AUTO)

When a signal (flag) that can be recognized by the unit is

input, the unit selects the optimum decoder for playing

back the signal in 6.1/7.1 channels.

If the unit cannot recognize the flag or no flag is present in

the input signal, it cannot automatically be played in 6.1/

7.1 channels.

Decoders (select with j / i)

You can select from the following decoders depending on

the format of the software you are playing.

PLIIxMovie

For playing back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 6.1/7.1

channels using the Pro Logic IIx movie decoder.

PLIIxMusic

For playing back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 6.1/7.1

channels using the Pro Logic IIx music decoder.

EX/ES

For playing back Dolby Digital signals in 6.1/7.1 channels

using the Dolby Digital Surround EX decoder.

DTS signals are played back in 6.1/7.1 channels using the

DTS-ES decoder.

For playing back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 6.1/7.1

channels using the Dolby Digital Surround EX decoder.

OFF (OFF)

Decoders are not used to create 6.1/7.1 channels.

When “SURR B L/R SP” is set to SMLx1 or LRGx1 (see

page 54), the surround back channel will be output from the left

SURROUND BACK speaker terminals.

Notes

TRANSMITCODE SET

STANDBY

SYSTEM

POWER

MD/CD-R

TUNER

V-AU X

DVD

AMP

POWERPOWER

VOLUME

TV MUTE TV INPUT

TV VOL TV CH

AVTV

VCR 1 DVR/VCR2

DTV/CBL

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

MUTE

MENUTITLE

VOLUME

SET MENU

LEVEL

A/B/C/D/E

STRAIGHT

ROCKJAZZHALLSTEREO

4321

ENTER

MOVIETV THTRMUSIC ENTERTAIN

EX/ESNIGHTq/DTS

EFFECT

TV MUTE TV INPUT

TV VOL TV CH

SELECT

PRESET/CH

Sound

field

program

buttons

AMP

CDTUNER

MD/CD-R

DVD

HiFi DSP

DTV/CBL

V-AUXVCR-1

DVR/VCR2

MATRIX DISCRETE

SILENT CINEMA NIGHT

ZONE2

PTY HOLD AUTO

PS RT CT EONPTY

TUNED STEREO MUTE

VOLUME

MEMORY

SLEEP

VIRTUAL

PCM

PL x

A B

96/24

LFE

L C R

SL SB SR

DIGITAL

01DJAZZA CLUBO00

STRAIGHT

ROCKJAZZHALLSTEREO

4321

ENTER

MOVIETV THTRMUSIC ENTERTAIN

EX/ESNIGHTq/DTS

EFFECT

AMP

Program name

EX/ES

SELECT

PRESET/CH

00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 33 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM

PLAYBACK

• Some 6.1-channel compatible discs do not have a signal (flag)

which this unit can automatically detect. When playing these

kinds of discs with 6.1-channel, select a decoder (PLIIx Movie,

PLIIx Music, EX/ES or EX) manually.

• 6.1-channel playback is not possible even if EX/ES is pressed in

the following cases:

– When “SURR L/R SP” (see page 53) or “SURR B L/R SP”

(see page 54) is set to NONE.

– When the source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jack is

being played.

– When the source being played does not contain surround left

and right channel signals.

– When a Dolby Digital KARAOKE source is being played.

– When “2ch Stereo” or PURE DIRECT is selected.

• When the power of this unit is turned off, the input mode will be

reset to AUTO.

• When the DTS-ES decoder is applied to DTS 96/24 signals, you

cannot use the DTS 96/24 decoding feature.

• The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “SURR B L/R

SP” is set to NONE (see page 54).

• PLIIxMovie cannot be selected when “SURR B L/R SP” is set

to SMLx1 or LRGx1 (see page 54).

■ Enjoying 2-channel software

Signals input from 2-channel sources can also be played

back on multiple channels.

Press q/DTS on the remote control to select the

decoder.

You can select from the following decoders depending on

the type of software you are playing and your personal

preference.

PRO LOGIC SUR. STANDARD

Standard processing for Dolby Surround sources.

PRO LOGIC SUR. ENHANCED

CINEMA DSP enhanced processing for Dolby Surround

sources.

PRO LOGIC IIx Movie

Dolby Pro Logic II/IIx processing for movie software.

PRO LOGIC IIx Music

Dolby Pro Logic II/IIx processing for music software.

PRO LOGIC IIx Game

Dolby Pro Logic II/IIx processing for game software.

DTS Neo:6 Cinema

DTS processing for movie software.

DTS Neo:6 Music

DTS processing for music software.

Use the PLII/PLIIx parameter to select the Pro Logic II or Pro

Logic IIx decoders (see page 72).

The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “SURR B L/R

SP” is set to NONE (see page 54).

Notes

Note

/DTS

00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 34 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM

English

PLAYBACK

BASIC

OPERATION

■ Listening to high fidelity stereo sound

(PURE DIRECT)

PURE DIRECT allows you to bypass this unit’s decoders

and DSP processors, and turn off the video circuitry and

front panel display to enjoy pure high fidelity sound from

analog and PCM sources.

Press PURE DIRECT to activate pure direct.

The indicator around the front panel button lights up.

The front panel display switches on momentarily when an

operation is performed.

To cancel, press PURE DIRECT again.

The indicator around the front panel button goes out and

the previous settings are restored.

• To avoid unexpected noise, do not play DTS-encoded CDs in

this mode.

• When a multi-channel signal (Dolby Digital or DTS) is input,

this unit automatically switches to the corresponding analog

input.

• No sound will be output from the subwoofer.

• The following operations are not possible during PURE

DIRECT operation:

– switching the sound field program

– displaying the OSD

– adjusting SET MENU parameters

– all video functions (video conversion etc.)

• PURE DIRECT is automatically cancelled whenever this unit is

set to the standby mode.

■ Night listening modes

The night listening modes are designed to improve

listenability at lower volumes or at night. Choose either

NIGHT:CINEMA or NIGHT:MUSIC depending on the

type of material you are playing.

Press NIGHT on the remote control repeatedly to

select cinema or music.

When night listening is selected, the NIGHT indicator in

the front panel display lights up.

• Select NIGHT:CINEMA when watching films to

reduce the dynamic range of film soundtracks and

make dialog easier to hear at lower volumes.

• Select NIGHT:MUSIC when listening to music sources

to preserve ease-of-listening for all sounds.

• Select OFF if you do not want to use this function.

Press j / i to adjust the effect level while

NIGHT:CINEMA or NIGHT:MUSIC is displayed.

This adjusts the level of compression.

• Select MIN for minimum compression.

• Select MID for standard compression.

• Select MAX for maximum compression.

NIGHT:CINEMA and NIGHT:MUSIC adjustments are stored

independently.

• You cannot use the night listening modes with PURE DIRECT

or MULTI CH INPUT (even though the NIGHT indicator lights

up when PURE DIRECT is selected).

• The night listening modes may vary in effectiveness depending

on the input source and surround sound settings you use.

Notes

PURE DIRECT

Front panel

Notes

Remote control

NIGHT

SELECT

PRESET/CH

Remote control

Effect.Lvl:MID

00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 35 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM

PLAYBACK

■ Downmixing to 2 channels

You can enjoy 2-channel stereo playback even from multi-

channel sources.

Rotate PROGRAM (or press STEREO on the

remote control) to select 2ch Stereo.

2ch Stereo

You can use a subwoofer with this program when SWFR or

BOTH is selected in “BASS OUT”.

■ Listening to unprocessed input signals

In STRAIGHT mode, two channel stereo sources are

output from only the front left and right speakers. Multi-

channel sources are decoded straight into the appropriate

channels without any additional effect processing.

Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) to select STRAIGHT.

STRAIGHT

Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) again so that “STRAIGHT”

disappears from the display when you want to turn the

sound effect back on.

■ Virtual CINEMA DSP

Virtual CINEMA DSP allows you to enjoy the CINEMA

DSP programs without surround speakers. It creates

virtual speakers to reproduce the natural sound field.

If you do not connect surround speakers, Virtual CINEMA

DSP activates automatically whenever you select a

CINEMA DSP sound field program.

Virtual CINEMA DSP will not activate, even when “SURR L/R

SP” is set to NONE (see page 53) in the following cases:

– When MULTI CH INPUT is selected as the input source.

– When headphones are connected to the PHONES jack.

This unit comes with a variety of input jacks. Do the

following to select the type of input signals you want to

use.

1 Rotate INPUT to select the input source.

2 Press INPUT MODE to select an input mode.

In most cases, use AUTO.

AUTO Automatically selects input signals in

the following order:

1) Digital signals

2) Analog signals

DTS Selects only digital signals encoded in

DTS. If no DTS signals are input, no

sound is output.

ANALOG Selects only analog signals. If no

analog signals are input, no sound is

output.

* If this unit detects a Dolby Digital or DTS signal, the

decoder automatically switches to the appropriate sound

field program.

You can adjust the default input mode this unit selects when the

power is turned on (see page 58).

Note

STRAIGHT

ROCKJAZZHALLSTEREO

4321

ENTER

MOVIETV THTRMUSIC ENTERTAIN

EX/ESNIGHTq/DTS

EFFECT

Front panel

PROGRAM

Remote control

EFFECT

STRAIGHT

ENTER

EFFECT

Front panel

Remote control

Selecting input modes

INPUT

INPUT MODE

CDTUNER

MD/CD-R

DVD

HiFi DSP

DTV/CBL

V-AUXVCR-1

DVR/VCR2

MATRIX DISCRETE

SILENT CINEMA NIGHT

ZONE2

PTY HOLD AUTO

PS RT CT EONPTY

TUNED STEREO MUTE

VOLUME

MEMORY

SLEEP

VIRTUAL

PCM

PL x

A B

96/24

LFE

L C R

SL SB SR

DIGITAL

01DDVD D AUTOO00

Input modeInput source

00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 36 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM

English

PLAYBACK

BASIC

OPERATION

• When you play DTS-encoded CD/LDs with the input mode set

to AUTO:

– This unit automatically switches to the DTS decoding mode.

The unit remains in DTS mode (and the t indicator may

flash) for up to 30 seconds after playback of the DTS source is

complete. To manually release the DTS mode, press INPUT

MODE to reselect AUTO.

– The DTS decoding mode may be released if search or skip

operations are performed for more than 30 seconds. To

prevent this, press INPUT MODE to select DTS.

• If the digital output data of the player has been processed in any

way, you may not be able to perform DTS decoding even if you

make a digital connection between this unit and the player.

Displaying information about the input

source

You can display the type, format and sampling frequency

of the current input signal.

1 Select the input source.

2 Press AMP to select the AMP mode, then

press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) so that

“STRAIGHT” appears in the display.

STRAIGHT

3 Press u / d to display the following

information about the input signal.

(Format) Signal format display. When the unit

cannot detect a digital signal it

automatically switches to analog input.

in Number of source channels in the input

signal. For example, a multi-channel

soundtrack with 3 front channels, 2

surround channels and LFE, is

displayed as “3/2/LFE”.

fs Sampling frequency. When the unit is

unable to detect the sampling

frequency “Unknown” appears.

rate Bit rate. When the unit is unable to

detect the bit rate “Unknown” appears.

flg Flag data encoded with DTS or Dolby

Digital signals that cue this unit to

automatically switch decoders.

Notes

MD/CD-R

TUNER

V-AUX

DVD

AMP

VCR 1 DVR/VCR2

DTV/CBL

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

STRAIGHT

ENTER

EFFECT

AMP

then

SELECT

PRESET/CH

00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 37 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM

TUNING

There are 2 tuning methods; automatic and manual.

Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are

strong and there is no interference.

■ Automatic tuning

1 Rotate INPUT to select TUNER as the input

source.

2 Press FM/AM to select the reception band.

“FM” or “AM” appears in the front panel display.

3 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO)

so that the AUTO indicator lights up in the

front panel display.

If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, tuning

is not possible. Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to

turn the colon (:) off.

4 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h once to begin

automatic tuning.

Press h to tune into a higher frequency, or press l

to tune into a lower frequency.

When tuned into a station, the TUNED indicator

lights up and the frequency of the received station is

shown in the front panel display.

TUNING

Automatic and manual tuning

AUTO/MAN'L MONO

S VIDEO VIDEO OPTICALL AUDIO R

MAN'L/AUTO FMLEVELNEXT

EDIT

EFFECT

MEMORYFM/AMPRESET/TUNING

OPTIMIZER

MIC

A/B/C/D/E

PROGRAM

PRESET/TUNING

TUNING MODE

PURE DIRECTINPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT

SPEAKERS

PHONES

SILENT CINEMA

STANDBY

/ON

MULTI CH

INPUT

VOLUME

VIDEO AUX

INPUT

3 312 4

(U.S.A. model)

INPUT

FM/AM

AUTO/MAN'L MONO

TUNING MODE

AUTO

Lights up

EDIT

PRESET/TUNING

TUNER

MD/CD-R

DVD

HiFi DSP

DTV/CBL

V-AUXVCR-1

/VCR2

T CINEMA NIGHT

ZONE2

PTY HOLD AUTO

PS RT CT EONPTY

TUNED STEREO ME

SLEEP

UAL

A B

-AAM1 1440k kHz

TUNER

MD/CD-R

DVD

HiFi DSP

DTV/CBL

V-AUXVCR-1

/VCR2

T CINEMA NIGHT

ZONE2

PTY HOLD AUTO

PS RT CT EONPTY

TUNED STEREO ME

SLEEP

UAL

A B

-AAM1 1530k kHz

LEVEL

l PRESET/TUNING h

00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 38 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM

English

TUNING

BASIC

OPERATION

■ Manual tuning

If the signal from the station you want to select is weak,

tune into it manually. Manually tuning into an FM station

will automatically switch the tuner to monaural reception

to increase the signal quality.

1 Select TUNER and the reception band

following steps 1 and 2 as described in

“Automatic tuning”.

2 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO)

so that the AUTO indicator disappears from

the front panel display.

If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, tuning

is not possible. Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to

turn the colon (:) off.

3 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h to tune into

the desired station manually.

Hold down the button to

continue searching.

■ Automatically presetting FM stations

You can use the automatic preset tuning feature to store

FM stations. This function enables this unit to

automatically tune into FM stations with strong signals,

and to store up to 40 (8 stations in 5 groups, A1 through

E8) of those stations in order. You can then recall any

preset station easily by selecting the preset station number.

1 Press FM/AM to select the FM band.

2 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO)

so that the AUTO indicator lights up in the

front panel display.

If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, tuning

is not possible. Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to

turn the colon (:) off.

AUTO/MAN'L MONO

TUNING MODE

AUTO

Disappears

EDIT

PRESET/TUNING

TUNER

MD/CD-R

DVD

HiFi DSP

DTV/CBL

V-AUXVCR-1

/VCR2

T CINEMA NIGHT

ZONE2

PTY HOLD AUTO

PS RT CT EONPTY

TUNED STEREO ME

SLEEP

UAL

A B

-AAM1 1440k kHz

LEVEL

l PRESET/TUNING h

Presetting stations

AUTO/MAN'L MONO

S VIDEO VIDEO OPTICALL AUDIO R

MAN'L/AUTO FMLEVELNEXT

EDIT

EFFECT

MEMORYFM/AMPRESET/TUNING

OPTIMIZER

MIC

A/B/C/D/E

PROGRAM

PRESET/TUNING

TUNING MODE

PURE DIRECTINPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT

SPEAKERS

PHONES

SILENT CINEMA

STANDBY

/ON

MULTI CH

INPUT

VOLUME

VIDEO AUX

INPUT

231

(U.S.A. model)

FM/AM

AUTO/MAN'L MONO

TUNING MODE

AUTO

Lights up

EDIT

PRESET/TUNING

TUNER

MD/CD-R

DVD

HiFi DSP

DTV/CBL

V-AUXVCR-1

/VCR2

T CINEMA NIGHT

ZONE2

PTY HOLD AUTO

PS RT CT EONPTY

TUNED STEREO ME

SLEEP

UAL

A B

-AAM1 1440k kHz

00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 39 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM

TUNING

3 Press and hold MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM)

for more than 3 seconds.

The preset number, the MEMORY and AUTO

indicators flash. After about 5 seconds, automatic

presetting starts from the frequency currently

displayed and proceeds toward the higher

frequencies.

When automatic preset tuning is completed, the front

panel display shows the frequency of the last preset

station.

• Any stored station data existing under a preset number is

cleared when you store a new station under that preset number.

• If the number of the received stations does not reach 40 (E8),

automatic preset tuning has automatically stopped after

searching all stations.

• Only FM stations with sufficient signal strength are stored

automatically by automatic preset tuning. If the station you

want to store is weak in signal strength, tune into it manually,

and store it by following the procedure in “Manually presetting

stations”.

Automatic preset tuning options

You can select the preset number from which this unit will

store FM stations and/or begin tuning toward lower

frequencies.

After pressing MEMORY in step 3:

1 Press A/B/C/D/E, then PRESET/TUNING l / h to

select the preset number under which the first station

will be stored. Automatic preset tuning will stop when

stations have all been stored up to E8.

2 Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn off the colon

(:) and then press PRESET/TUNING l to begin

tuning toward the lower frequencies.

■ Manually presetting stations

You can also store up to 40 stations (8 stations in 5 groups,

A1 through E8) manually.

1 Tune into a station.

See page 38 for tuning instructions.

When tuned into a station, the front panel display

shows the frequency of the station received.

2 Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM).

The MEMORY indicator flashes for about 5 seconds.

3 Press A/B/C/D/E repeatedly to select a preset

station group (A to E) while the MEMORY

indicator is flashing.

The group letter appears. Check that the colon (:)

appears in the front panel display.

Notes

Memory back-up

The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data

from being lost even if this unit is set in the standby

mode, the power cord is disconnected from the AC

outlet, or the power supply is temporarily cut due to

power failure. However, if the power is cut for more

than one week, the preset stations may be cleared. If

so, store the stations again by using the presetting

station methods.

MAN'L/AUTO FM

MEMORY

CDTUNER

MD/CD-R

DVD

HiFi DSP

DTV/CBL

V-AUXVCR-1

DVR/VCR2

MATRIX DISCRETE

SILENT CINEMA NIGHT

ZONE2

PTY HOLD AUTO

PS RT CT EONPTY

TUNED STEREO MUTE

VOLUME

MEMORY

SLEEP

VIRTUAL

PCM

PL x

A B

96/24

LFE

L C R

SL SB SR

DIGITAL

A1 1:FM187.5k MHz

AUTO/MAN'L MONO

S VIDEO VIDEO OPTICALL AUDIO R

MAN'L/AUTO FMLEVELNEXT

EDIT

EFFECT

MEMORYFM/AMPRESET/TUNING

OPTIMIZER

MIC

A/B/C/D/E

PROGRAM

PRESET/TUNING

TUNING MODE

PURE DIRECTINPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT

SPEAKERS

PHONES

SILENT CINEMA

STANDBY

/ON

MULTI CH

INPUT

VOLUME

VIDEO AUX

INPUT

43 2,5

(U.S.A. model)

CDTUNER

MD/CD-R

DVD

HiFi DSP

DTV/CBL

V-AUXVCR-1

DVR/VCR2

MATRIX DISCRETE

SILENT CINEMA NIGHT

ZONE2

PTY HOLD AUTO

PS RT CT EONPTY

TUNED STEREO MUTE

VOLUME

MEMORY

SLEEP

VIRTUAL

PCM

PL x

A B

96/24

LFE

L C R

SL SB SR

DIGITAL

A11:AM18630k kHz

MAN'L/AUTO FM

MEMORY

Flashes

A/B/C/D/E

CDTUNER

MD/CD-R

DVD

HiFi DSP

DTV/CBL

V-AUXVCR-1

DVR/VCR2

MATRIX DISCRETE

SILENT CINEMA NIGHT

ZONE2

PTY HOLD AUTO

PS RT CT EONPTY

TUNED STEREO MUTE

VOLUME

MEMORY

SLEEP

VIRTUAL

PCM

PL x

A B

96/24

LFE

L C R

SL SB SR

DIGITAL

C11:AM18630k kHz

Preset group

00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 40 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM

English

TUNING

BASIC

OPERATION

4 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h to select a

preset station number (1 through 8) while the

MEMORY indicator is flashing.

Press h to select a higher preset station number.

Press l to select a lower preset station number.

5 Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) on the

front panel while the MEMORY indicator is

flashing.

The station band and

frequency appear in the front

panel display with the preset

group and number you have

selected.

6 Repeat steps 1 to 5 to store other stations.

• Any stored station data existing under a preset number is

cleared when you store a new station under that preset number.

• The reception mode (stereo or monaural) is stored along with

the station frequency.

You can tune any desired station simply by selecting the

preset station number under which it was stored.

When performing this operation with the remote

control, first press TUNER to set the remote to

tuner mode.

1 Press A/B/C/D/E to select the preset station

group.

The preset group letter appears in the front panel

display and changes each time you press the button.

2 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h (PRESET CH

u / d on the remote control) to select a

preset station number (1 through 8).

The preset group and number appear on the front

panel display along with the station band, frequency

and the TUNED indicator lights up.

Notes

LEVEL

l PRESET/TUNING h

CDTUNER

MD/CD-R

DVD

HiFi DSP

DTV/CBL

V-AUXVCR-1

DVR/VCR2

MATRIX DISCRETE

SILENT CINEMA NIGHT

ZONE2

PTY HOLD AUTO

PS RT CT EONPTY

TUNED STEREO MUTE

VOLUME

MEMORY

SLEEP

VIRTUAL

PCM

PL x

A B

96/24

LFE

L C R

SL SB SR

DIGITAL

C1 3:AM18630kkHz

Preset number

MAN'L/AUTO FM

MEMORY

CDTUNER

MD/CD-R

DVD

HiFi DSP

DTV/CBL

V-AUXVCR-1

DVR/VCR2

MATRIX DISCRETE

SILENT CINEMA NIGHT

ZONE2

PTY HOLD AUTO

PS RT CT EONPTY

TUNED STEREO MUTE

VOLUME

MEMORY

SLEEP

VIRTUAL

PCM

PL x

A B

96/24

LFE

L C R

SL SB SR

DIGITAL

C1 3:AM18630kkHz

Shows the displayed station has been stored as C3.

Selecting preset stations

AUTO/MAN'L MONO

S VIDEO VIDEO OPTICALL AUDIO R

MAN'L/AUTO FMLEVELNEXT

EDIT

EFFECT

MEMORYFM/AMPRESET/TUNING

OPTIMIZER

MIC

A/B/C/D/E

PROGRAM

PRESET/TUNING

TUNING MODE

PURE DIRECTINPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT

SPEAKERS

PHONES

SILENT CINEMA

STANDBY

/ON

MULTI CH

INPUT

VOLUME

VIDEO AUX

INPUT

REC

AUDI O

MENUTITLE

SET MENU

LEVEL

A/B/C/D/E

TEST

ON SCREEN

STRAIGHT

1009

ENTER

EX/ESNIGHT

/DTS

EFFECT

DISPLAYRETURN

SELECT

PRESET/CH

(U.S.A. model)

A/B/C/D/E

SET MENU

A/B/C/D/E

Front panel Remote control

LEVEL

l PRESET/TUNING h

CDTUNER

MD/CD-R

DVD

HiFi DSP

DTV/CBL

V-AUXVCR-1

DVR/VCR2

SILENT CINEMA NIGHT

ZONE2

PTY HOLD AUTO

PS RT CT EONPTY

TUNED STEREO

MEMORY

SLEEP

VIRTUAL

A B

E1 1:FM187.5k MHz

Front panel

Remote control

SELECT

PRESET/CH

00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 41 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM

TUNING

You can exchange the assignment of two preset stations

with each other. The example below describes the

procedure for exchanging preset station “E1” with “A5”.

1 Select preset station “E1” using A/B/C/D/E

and PRESET/TUNING l / h.

See “Selecting preset stations”.

2 Press and hold PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) for

more than 3 seconds.

“E1” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front

panel display.

3 Select preset station “A5” using A/B/C/D/E

and PRESET/TUNING l / h.

“A5” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front

panel display.

4 Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) again.

The stations stored at the two preset assignments are

exchanged.

Exchanging preset stations

AUTO/MAN'L MONO

S VIDEO VIDEO OPTICALL AUDIO R

MAN'L/AUTO FMLEVELNEXT

EDIT

EFFECT

MEMORYFM/AMPRESET/TUNING

OPTIMIZER

MIC

A/B/C/D/E

PROGRAM

PRESET/TUNING

TUNING MODE

PURE DIRECTINPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT

SPEAKERS

PHONES

SILENT CINEMA

STANDBY

/ON

MULTI CH

INPUT

VOLUME

VIDEO AUX

INPUT

2,4 1,31,3

(U.S.A. model)

EDIT

PRESET/TUNING

CDTUNER

MD/CD-R

DVD

HiFi DSP

DTV/CBL

V-AUXVCR-1

DVR/VCR2

SILENT CINEMA NIGHT

ZONE2

PTY HOLD AUTO

PS RT CT EONPTY

TUNED STEREO

MEMORY

SLEEP

VIRTUAL

A B

E1 1:FM187.5k MHz

CDTUNER

MD/CD-R

DVD

HiFi DSP

DTV/CBL

V-AUXVCR-1

DVR/VCR2

SILENT CINEMA NIGHT

ZONE2

PTY HOLD AUTO

PS RT CT EONPTY

TUNED STEREO

MEMORY

SLEEP

VIRTUAL

A B

A1 5:FM190.6k MHz

A/B/C/D/E

LEVEL

l PRESET/TUNING h

CDTUNER

MD/CD-R

DVD

HiFi DSP

DTV/CBL

V-AUXVCR-1

DVR/VCR2

SILENT CINEMA NIGHT

ZONE2

PTY HOLD AUTO

PS RT CT EONPTY

TUNED STEREO

MEMORY

SLEEP

VIRTUAL

A B

E1 EDIT18E1-A5Hz

EDIT

PRESET/TUNING

00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 42 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM

RECORDING

English

BASIC

OPERATION

Recording adjustments and other operations are

performed from the recording components. Refer to the

operating instructions for those components.

1 Turn on the power of this unit and all

connected components.

2 Select the source component you want to

record from.

3 Start playback (or select a broadcast station)

on the source component.

4 Start recording on the recording component.

Do a test recording before you start an actual recording.

• When this unit is set in the standby mode, you cannot record

between other components connected to this unit.

• The setting of TONE CONTROL, VOLUME, “SPEAKER

LEVEL” (page 55) and programs does not affect recorded

material.

• A source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks of this unit

cannot be recorded.

• S-Video and composite video signals pass independently

through this unit’s video circuits. Therefore, when recording or

dubbing video signals, if your video source component is

connected to provide only an S-Video (or only a composite

video) signal, you can record only an S-Video (or only a

composite video) signal to your VCR.

• Digital signals input to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks are not

output to the analog AUDIO OUT (L/R) jacks for recording.

Likewise, analog signals input to the AUDIO IN (L/R) jacks are

not output to the DIGITAL OUTPUT jack. Therefore, if your

source component is connected to provide only digital (or

analog) signals, you can only record digital (or analog) signals.

• A given input source is not output on the same REC OUT

channel. (For example, the signal input from VCR 1 IN is not

output on VCR 1 OUT.)

• Check the copyright laws in your country to record from

records, CDs, radio, etc. Recording of copyrighted material may

infringe copyright laws.

■ Special considerations when recording

DTS software

The DTS signal is a digital bitstream. Attempting to

digitally record the DTS bitstream will result in noise

being recorded. Therefore, if you want to use this unit to

record sources that have DTS signals recorded on them,

the following considerations and adjustments need to be

made.

For DVDs and CDs encoded with DTS, when your player

is compatible with the DTS format, follow its operating

instructions to make a setting so that the analog signal will

be output from the player.

RECORDING

AUTO/MAN'L MONO

S VIDEO VIDEO OPTICALL AUDIO R

MAN'L/AUTO FMLEVELNEXT

EDIT

EFFECT

MEMORYFM/AMPRESET/TUNING

OPTIMIZER

MIC

A/B/C/D/E

PROGRAM

PRESET/TUNING

TUNING MODE

PURE DIRECTINPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT

SPEAKERS

PHONES

SILENT CINEMA

STANDBY

/ON

MULTI CH

INPUT

VOLUME

VIDEO AUX

INPUT

TRANSMITCODE SET

STANDBY

SYSTEM

POWER

MD/CD-R

TUNER

V-AU X

DVD

AMP

POWERPOWER

VOLUME

TV MUTE TV INPUT

TV VOL TV CH

AVTV

DTV/CBL

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

VCR 1 DVR/VCR2

(U.S.A. model)

INPUT

MD/CD-R

TUNER

V-AUX

DVD

AMP

VCR 1 DVR/VCR2

DTV/CBL

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

Front panel Remote control

Notes

If you playback a video source that uses scrambled or

encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, the

picture itself may be disturbed due to those signals.

00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 43 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS

This unit is equipped with a variety of precise digital decoders that allow you to enjoy multichannel playback from

almost any sound source (stereo or multichannel). This unit is also equipped with a YAMAHA digital sound field

processing (DSP) chip containing several sound field programs which you can use to enhance your playback experience.

Most of these sound field programs are precise digital recreations of actual acoustic environments found in famous

concert halls, music venues, and movie theaters.

The YAMAHA CINEMA DSP modes are compatible with all Dolby Digital, DTS, and Dolby Surround sources. Set the input mode to

AUTO (see page 36) to enable this unit to automatically switch to the appropriate digital decoder according to the input signal.

• This unit’s DSP sound field programs are recreations of real-world acoustic environments made from precise measurements taken in

the actual hall, etc. Thus you may notice variations in the strength of the reflections coming from the front, back, left and right.

• Feel free to choose a sound field program based on your listening preference, and not purely on the name of the program itself.

You can select from the following sound fields when playing movie or video sources. The sound fields marked “MULTI”

can be used with multi-channel sources, like DVD, digital TV, etc. Those marked “2-CH” can be used with 2-channel

(stereo) sources like TV programs, video tapes, etc.

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS

Notes

For movie/video sources

Program Features Sources

STEREO:

2ch Stereo

Downmixes multi-channel sources to 2 channel (left and right) or plays back 2-channel

sources as is.

MULTI

2-CH

MUSIC VIDEO

This program lends an enthusiastic atmosphere to the sound, giving you the feeling you are at

an actual jazz or rock concert.

ENTERTAINMENT:

Game

This program adds a deep and spatial feeling to video game sounds.

TV THEATER:

Mono Movie

This program is provided for reproducing monaural video sources (such as old movies). The

program produces the optimum reverberation to create sound depth using only the presernce

sound field.

TV THEATER:

Variety/Sports

Though the presence sound field is relatively narrow, the surround sound field employs the

sound environment of a large concert hall. This effect enhances the experience of watching

various TV programs such as news, variety shows, music programs or sports programs.

MOVIE THEATER:

Spectacle

CINEMA DSP processing. This program creates the extremely wide sound field of a 70-mm

movie theater. It precisely reproduces the source sound in detail, making both the video and the

sound field incredibly real. This is ideal for any kind of video source encoded with Dolby

Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS (especially large-scale movie productions).

MOVIE THEATER:

Sci-Fi

CINEMA DSP processing. This program clearly reproduces dialog and sound effects in the

latest sound form for science fiction films, thus creating a broad and expansive cinematic space

amid silence. You can enjoy science fiction films in a virtual-space sound field that includes

Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital and DTS-encoded software employing the most advanced

techniques.

MOVIE THEATER:

Adventure

CINEMA DSP processing. This program is ideal for precisely reproducing the sound design of

the newest 70-mm and multichannel soundtrack films. The sound field is made to be similar to

that of the newest movie theaters, so the reverberations of the sound field itself are restrained

as much as possible.

MOVIE THEATER:

General

CINEMA DSP processing. This program is for reproducing sounds from 70-mm and

multichannel soundtrack films, and is characterized by soft and extensive sound field.

00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 44 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM

English

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS

SOUND FIELD

PROGRAMS

DOLBY DIGITAL:

SUR. STANDARD

Standard 5.1-channel processing for Dolby Digital sources.

MULTI

DOLBY DIGITAL:

SUR. ENHANCED

CINEMA DSP enhanced processing for Dolby Digital sources.

q D+PLIIx Movie:

SUR. STANDARD

Standard 6.1/7.1-channel processing (Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie) for Dolby Digital sources.

q D+PLIIx Movie:

SUR. ENHANCED

CINEMA DSP enhanced 6.1/7.1-channel processing (Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie) for Dolby

Digital sources.

DOLBY D EX:

SUR. STANDARD

Standard 6.1-channel processing for Dolby Digital sources.

DOLBY D EX:

SUR. ENHANCED

CINEMA DSP enhanced 6.1-channel processing (Dolby Digital EX) for Dolby Digital

sources.

DTS:

SUR. STANDARD

Standard 5.1-channel processing for DTS sources.

MULTI

DTS 96/24:

SUR. STANDARD

Standard 5.1-channel processing for 96-kHz/24-bit DTS sources.

DTS:

SUR. ENHANCED

CINEMA DSP enhanced processing for DTS and 96-kHz/24-bit DTS sources.

DTS+PLIIx Movie:

SUR. STANDARD

Standard 6.1/7.1-channel processing (Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie) for DTS sources.

DTS+PLIIx Movie:

SUR. ENHANCED

CINEMA DSP enhanced 6.1/7.1-channel processing (Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie) for DTS

sources.

DTS+DOLBY EX:

SUR. STANDARD

Standard 6.1-channel processing (Dolby Digital EX) for DTS sources.

DTS+DOLBY EX:

SUR. ENHANCED

CINEMA DSP enhanced 6.1-channel processing (Dolby Digital EX) for DTS sources.

DTS ES Mtrx6.1:

SUR. STANDARD

Standard 6.1-channel processing (DTS-ES Matrix) for DTS sources.

DTS ES Mtrx6.1:

SUR. ENHANCED

CINEMA DSP enhanced processing (DTS-ES Matrix) for DTS sources.

DTS ES Disc6.1:

SUR. STANDARD

Standard 6.1-channel processing (DTS-ES Discrete) for DTS sources.

DTS ES Disc6.1:

SUR. ENHANCED

CINEMA DSP enhanced processing (DTS-ES Discrete) for DTS sources.

Program Features Sources

00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 45 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS

You can select either Pro Logic IIx or Pro Logic II processing using the PLII/PLIIx parameter on page 72.

PRO LOGIC:

SUR. STANDARD

Standard processing for Dolby Surround sources.

2-CH

PRO LOGIC:

SUR. ENHANCED

CINEMA DSP enhanced processing for Dolby Surround sources.

PRO LOGIC IIx:

PLIIx Movie

Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for movie software.

PRO LOGIC II:

PLII Movie

Dolby Pro Logic II processing for movie software.

PRO LOGIC IIx:

PLIIx Game

Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for game software.

PRO LOGIC II:

PLII Game

Dolby Pro Logic II processing for game software.

DTS: Neo:6 Cinema

DTS processing for movie software.

Program Features Sources

00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 46 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM

English

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS

SOUND FIELD

PROGRAMS

You can select from the following sound fields when playing music sources, like CD, FM/AM broadcasting, tapes, etc.

You can select either Pro Logic IIx or Pro Logic II processing using the PLII/PLIIx parameter on page 72.

For music sources

Program Features Sources

CONCERT HALL

HiFi DSP processing. A classic shoe-box type concert hall with approximately 1700 seats.

Pillars and ornate carvings create extremely complex reflections which produce a very full,

rich sound.

MULTI

2-CH

JAZZ CLUB

HiFi DSP processing. This is the sound field at stage front in “The Bottom Line”, a famous

New York jazz club. The floor can seat 300 people to the left and right in a sound field offering

a real and vibrant sound.

ROCK CONCERT

HiFi DSP processing. The ideal program for lively, dynamic rock music. The data for this

program was recorded at LA’s “hottest” rock club. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center-

left of the hall.

ENTERTAINMENT:

Disco

HiFi DSP processing. This program recreates the acoustic environment of a lively disco in the

heart of a big city. The sound is dense and highly concentrated. It is also characterized by high-

energy, “immediate” sound.

q D+PLIIx Music:

SUR. STANDARD

Standard Dolby Digital and Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for music sources.

MULTI

q D+PLIIx Music:

SUR. ENHANCED

CINEMA DSP enhanced Dolby Digital and Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for music sources.

DTS+PLIIx Music:

SUR. STANDARD

Standard DTS and Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for music sources.

DTS+PLIIx Music:

SUR. ENHANCED

CINEMA DSP enhanced DTS and Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for music sources.

STEREO:

2ch Stereo

2-channel (left and right) playback.

2-CH

STEREO:

7ch Stereo

Use to increase the output stereo sources (in stereo) from all speakers. This provides a larger

sound field and is ideal for background music at parties, etc.

PRO LOGIC IIx:

PLIIx Music

Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for music software.

PRO LOGIC II:

PLII Music

Dolby Pro Logic II processing for music software.

DTS: Neo:6 Music

DTS processing for music software.

00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 47 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM

ADVANCED OPERATIONS

You can display this unit’s operating information on a

video monitor. If you display the SET MENU and sound

field program parameter settings on a monitor, it is much

easier to see the available options and parameters than it is

by reading this information on the front panel display.

1 Turn on the video monitor connected to this

unit.

2 Press ON SCREEN repeatedly to change the

OSD mode.

The OSD mode changes in the

following order: full display, short

display, and display off.

Full display

Always shows the sound field program parameter settings

as well as the contents of the front panel display.

Short display

Briefly shows the contents of the front panel display at the

bottom of the screen each time you operate this unit.

Display off

Only operations performed using ON SCREEN are

displayed. The OSD is displayed when using SET MENU

or the test tone feature, even if the OSD mode is set to

“Display off”.

• The OSD signal is not output to the REC OUT jack, and will

not be recorded.

• You can set the OSD to turn on (gray background) or off when a

video source is not being reproduced (or the source component

is turned off) by using “DISPLAY SET” (see page 58).

Use this feature to automatically set this unit in the

standby mode after a certain amount of time. The sleep

timer is useful when you are going to sleep while this unit

is playing or recording a source. The sleep timer also

automatically turns off any external components

connected to the AC OUTLET(S).

■ Setting the sleep timer

1 Select a source and start playback on the

source component.

2 Press SLEEP repeatedly to set

the amount of time.

Each time you press SLEEP, the front

panel display changes as shown

below. The SLEEP indicator flashes

while switching the amount of time

for the sleep timer.

The SLEEP indicator lights up in the front panel

display, and the display returns to the selected sound

field program.

ADVANCED OPERATIONS

Selecting the OSD mode

Notes

ON SCREEN

DISPLAY

P08

MOVIE THEATER

.General

DSPLEVEL;;;;0dB

P.INIT.DLY;;15ms

P.ROOMSIZE;;1.0

S.INIT.DLY;;20ms

S.ROOMSIZE;;1.0

P08MOVIETHEATER

General

Full display Short display

Using the sleep timer

TRANSMITCODE SET

STANDBY

SYSTEM

POWER

MD/CD-R

TUNER

V-AU X

DVD

AMP

POWERPOWER

VOLUME

TV MUTE TV INPUT

TV VOL TV CH

AVTV

VCR 1 DVR/VCR2

DTV/CBL

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

SLEEP 90min

SLEEP 60minSLEEP 30minSLEEP OFF

SLEEP 120min

CDTUNER

MD/CD-R

DVD

HiFi DSP

DTV/CBL

V-AUXVCR-1

DVR/VCR2

MATRIX DISCRETE

SILENT CINEMA NIGHT

ZONE2

PTY HOLD AUTO

PS RT CT EONPTY

TUNED STEREO MUTE

VOLUME

MEMORY

SLEEP

VIRTUAL

PCM

PL x

A B

96/24

LFE

L C R

SL SB SR

DIGITAL

E1 SLEEP8120minz

CDTUNER

MD/CD-R

DVD

HiFi DSP

DTV/CBL

V-AUXVCR-1

DVR/VCR2

MATRIX DISCRETE

SILENT CINEMA NIGHT

ZONE2

PTY HOLD AUTO

PS RT CT EONPTY

TUNED STEREO MUTE

VOLUME

MEMORY

SLEEP

VIRTUAL

PCM

PL x

A B

96/24

LFE

L C R

SL SB SR

DIGITAL

E1 CONCERT2HALLz

SLEEP indicator

00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 48 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM

English

ADVANCED OPERATIONS

ADVANCED

OPERATION

■ Canceling the sleep timer

Press SLEEP repeatedly until “SLEEP OFF” appears in

the front panel display.

After a few seconds, “SLEEP OFF” disappears, and the

SLEEP indicator goes off.

The sleep timer setting can also be canceled by pressing

STANDBY on the remote control (or STANDBY/ON on the front

panel) to set this unit to the standby mode.

You can adjust the output level of each speaker while

listening to a music source. This is also possible when

playing sources through the MULTI CH INPUT jacks.

Please note that this operation will override the level

adjustments made in “AUTO SETUP” (page 25),

“SPEAKER LEVEL” (page 55) and “Using the test tone”

(page 50).

1 Press AMP.

2 Press LEVEL repeatedly to select the

speaker you want to adjust.

FRONT L Front left speaker level

CENTER Center speaker level

FRONT R Front right speaker level

SUR.R Surround right speaker level

SUR.B.R Surround back right speaker level

SUR.B.L Surround back left speaker level

SUR.L Surround left speaker level

SWFR Subwoofer level

PRES Presence speaker level

Once you press LEVEL, you can also select the speaker by

pressing u / d.

3 Press j / i to adjust the speaker output level.

The control range is from +10 dB to –10 dB.

4 Press SELECT when you have completed

your adjustment.

This operation can also be performed using the controls on the

front panel. Press NEXT repeatedly to select the speaker you

want to adjust, then press LEVEL –/+ to adjust the output level.

SLEEP

SLEEP OFF

Manually adjusting speaker levels

AMP

REC

AUDIO

MUTE

MENUTITLE

VOLUME

SET MENU

LEVEL

A/B/C/D/E

TEST

ON SCREEN

STRAIGHT

ROCKJAZZHALLSTEREO

4321

ENTER

MOVIETV THTRMUSIC ENTERTAIN

EX/ESNIGHTq/DTS

EFFECT

DISPLAYRETURN

TV MUTE TV INPUT

TV VOL TV CH

VCR 1 DVR/VCR2

PRESET/CH

SELECT

00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 49 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM

ADVANCED OPERATIONS

You can use the test tone feature to manually balance your

speaker levels. Please note that this operation will override

the level adjustments made in “AUTO SETUP” (page 25),

“SPEAKER LEVEL” (page 55) and “Manually adjusting

speaker levels” (page 49). Use the test tone to set speaker

levels so that the volume from each speaker is identical

when heard from your listening position.

You cannot activate the test tone if headphones are connected to

the

PHONES jack. Remove the headphones from the PHONES

jack.

1 Press AMP.

2 Press TEST.

The unit outputs a test tone.

3 Press u / d repeatedly to select the speaker

you want to adjust.

TEST LEFT Front left speaker

TEST CENTER Center speaker

TEST RIGHT Front right speaker

TEST SUR.R Right surround speaker

TEST SUR.B.R Right surround back speaker

TEST SUR.B.L Left surround back speaker

TEST SUR.L Left surround speaker

TEST SUBWOOFER Subwoofer

4 Press j / i to adjust the speaker volumes.

5 Press TEST when you have completed your

adjustment.

The test tone stops.

If PRESENCE SP in “SPEAKER SET” is set to YES,

you can adjust the presence speaker volumes

(proceed to step 6).

■ Outputting the test tone from the

PRESENCE speakers

6 Press u / d repeatedly to select the speaker

from which you want to output the test tone.

TEST FRONT Front speakers

TEST PRESENCE Presence speakers

TEST PRES L Left presence speakers

TEST PRES R Right presence speakers

7 Press j / i to adjust the presence speaker

volumes.

8 Press TEST when you have completed your

adjustment.

The test tone stops.

Using the test tone

Note

AMP

REC

AUDIO

MUTE

MENUTITLE

VOLUME

SET MENU

LEVEL

A/B/C/D/E

TEST

ON SCREEN

STRAIGHT

ROCKJAZZHALLSTEREO

4321

ENTER

MOVIETV THTRMUSIC ENTERTAIN

EX/ESNIGHTq/DTS

EFFECT

DISPLAYRETURN

TV MUTE TV INPUT

TV VOL TV CH

SELECT

VCR 1 DVR/VCR2

PRESET/CH

3,4,6,7

2,5,8

00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 50 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM

SET MENU

English

ADVANCED

OPERATION

You can use the following parameters in SET MENU to adjust a variety of system settings and customize the way this

unit operates. Change the initial settings (indicated in bold under each parameter) to reflect the needs of your listening

environment.

■ AUTO SETUP

Use to specify which speaker parameters auto setup will adjust, and to activate the auto setup procedure (see page 25).

■ MANUAL SETUP

Use to manually adjust speaker and system parameters.

1 SOUND MENU

Use to manually adjust any speaker setting, alter the quality and tone of the sound output by the system or compensate for

video signal processing delays when using LCD monitors or projectors.

Most of the parameters described in SOUND MENU are set automatically when you run auto setup (see page 25). You can use SOUND

MENU to make further adjustments, but we recommend running auto setup first

2 INPUT MENU

Use to reassign digital input/outputs and select the input mode.

3 OPTION MENU

Use to adjust the optional system parameters.

SET MENU

Item Features Page

A)SPEAKER SET

Selects the size of each speaker, the speakers for low-frequency signal output, and the cross over

frequency.

B)SPEAKER LEVEL

Adjusts the output level of each speaker.

C)SP DISTANCE

Adjusts the delay time of each speaker.

D)CENTER GEQ

Adjusts the tonal quality of the center speaker.

E)LFE LEVEL

Adjusts the output level of the LFE channel for Dolby Digital or DTS signals.

F)DYNAMIC RANGE

Adjusts the dynamic range for Dolby Digital or DTS signals.

G)AUDIO SET

Customizes the muting level, audio delay and height of the front and center channel sounds.

H)PR/SB SELECT

Selects priority to either surround back or presence speakers when both sets of speakers are

connected to this unit.

Item Features Page

A)I/O ASSIGNMENT

Assigns jacks according to the component to be used.

B)INPUT MODE

Selects the initial input mode of the source.

Item Features Page

A)DISPLAY SET

Adjusts the brightness of the display and converts video signals.

B)MEMORY GUARD

Locks sound field program parameters and other SET MENU settings.

C)PARAM. INI

Initializes the parameters of a group of sound field programs.

D)ZONE SET

Specifies the location of the speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals.

E)ZONE2 SET

Selects how the ZONE 2 speakers will be amplified.

00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 51 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM

SET MENU

Use the remote control to access and adjust each

parameter.

You can change SET MENU parameters while the unit is

reproducing sound.

You cannot change some SET MENU parameters while the unit

is in either cinema or music night listening mode.

1 Press AMP.

2 Press SET MENU.

3 Press u / d to select MANUAL SETUP.

4 Press SELECT to enter MANUAL SETUP.

1 SOUND MENU appears on the front panel display.

5 Press u / d to select the desired menu.

6 Press SELECT to enter the selected menu.

7 Press u / d to select the item you want to

adjust, then press j / i to change the setting

of the item.

Repeat this operation to select and adjust each setting.

To return to the previous menu level, press RETURN.

8 To exit, press SET MENU when finished.

Using SET MENU

Note

AMP

REC

AUDIO

MUTE

MENUTITLE

VOLUME

SET MENU

LEVEL

A/B/C/D/E

TEST

ON SCREEN

STRAIGHT

ROCKJAZZHALLSTEREO

4321

ENTER

MOVIETV THTRMUSIC ENTERTAIN

EX/ESNIGHTq/DTS

EFFECT

DISPLAYRETURN

TV MUTE TV INPUT

TV VOL TV CH

SELECT

VCR 1 DVR/VCR2

PRESET/CH

3-7

2,8

AMP

SET MENU

A/B/C/D/E

SELECT

PRESET/CH



SET MENU

;AUTOSETUP

.;MANUALSETUP

[]/[]:Up/Down

[SELECT]:Enter

Memory back-up

The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data

from being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode.

However, if the power cord is disconnected from the

AC outlet, or the power supply is cut for more than one

week, the stored data will be lost. If so, adjust the

items again.

SELECT

PRESET/CH

;MANUAL SETUP

.1SOUNDMENU

2INPUTMENU

3OPTIONMENU

[]/[]:Up/Down

[SELECT]:Enter

.A)SPEAKERSET

B)SPEAKERLEVEL

C)SPDISTANCE

D)CENTERGEQ

[]/[]:Up/Down

[SELECT]:Enter

1 SOUND

MENU 1/2

SELECT

PRESET/CH

-+

.FR

C

SL

B)SPEAKER

LEVEL

SET MENU

A/B/C/D/E

00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 52 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM

English

SET MENU

ADVANCED

OPERATION

Use to manually adjust any speaker setting or compensate

for video signal processing delays when using LCD

monitors or projectors. Most of the SOUND MENU

parameters are set automatically when you run auto setup

(see page 25).

■ Speaker set A)SPEAKER SET

Use to manually adjust any speaker setting.

If you are not satisfied with the bass sounds from your speakers,

you can change these settings according to your preference.

Center speaker CENTER SP

Choices: NONE, SML, LRG

• Select NONE if you do not have a center speaker. The

unit directs all of the center channel signal to the front

left and right speakers.

• Select SML if you have a small center speaker. The

unit directs the low-frequency signals of the center

channel to the speakers selected with “LFE/BASS

OUT”.

• Select LRG if you have a large center speaker. The unit

directs the entire range of the center channel signal to

the center speaker.

Front speakers FRONT SP

Choices: SMALL, LARGE

• Select SMALL if you have small front speakers. The

unit directs the low-frequency signals of the front

channel to the speakers selected with “LFE/BASS

OUT”.

• Select LARGE if you have large front speakers. The

unit directs the entire range of the front left and right

channel signals to the front left and right speakers.

Surround left/right speakers SURR L/R SP

Choices: NONE, SML, LRG

• Select NONE if you do not have surround speakers.

This will set the unit to the Virtual CINEMA DSP

mode (see page 36) and automatically set the surround

back speaker setting (SURR B L/R SP) to NONE.

• Select SML if you have small surround left and right

speakers. The low-frequency signals of the surround

channel are directed to the speakers selected with

“LFE/BASS OUT”.

• Select LRG if you have large surround left and right

speakers. The entire range of the surround channel

signal is directed to the surround left and right

speakers.

1 SOUND MENU

.A)SPEAKERSET

B)SPEAKERLEVEL

C)SPDISTANCE

D)CENTERGEQ

[]/[]:Up/Down

[SELECT]:Enter

1 SOUND

MENU 1/2

NONE)SMLLRG

CENTER SP

SMALL)LARGE

FRONT SP

NONE)SMLLRG

SURR L/R SP

00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 53 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM

SET MENU

Surround back speakers SURR B L/R SP

Choices: NONE, SMLx1, SMLx2, LRGx1, LRGx2

• Select NONE if you do not have a surround back

speaker. The unit directs all of the surround back

channel signal to the surround left and right speakers.

• Select SMLx1 if you have a small surround back

speaker. The low-frequency signals of the surround

back channel are directed to the speakers selected with

“LFE/BASS OUT”, and the rest of the frequency

signals are directed to the left surround back speaker.

• Select SMLx2 if you have 2 small surround back

speakers. The low-frequency signals of the surround

back channels are directed to the speakers selected with

“LFE/BASS OUT”.

• Select LRGx1 if you have a large surround back

speaker. The unit directs the entire range of the

surround back channel signal to the left surround back

speaker.

• Select LRGx2 if you have 2 large surround back

speakers. The unit directs the entire range of the

surround back channel signal to the surround back

speakers.

If you select SMLx1 or LRGx1, connect the speaker to the left

SURROUND BACK speaker terminals.

Presence speakers PRESENCE SP

Choices: NONE, YES

• Select NONE if you do not have presence speakers.

• Select YES if you have presence speakers.

Bass out LFE/BASS OUT

Low-frequency (bass) signals can be directed to the

subwoofer and/or the front left and right speakers

according to the characteristics of your system. This

setting also determines the routing of the LFE (low-

frequency effect) signals found in Dolby Digital or DTS

sources.

Choices: SWFR, FRNT, BOTH

• Select SWFR if you connect a subwoofer. LFE and

low-frequency signals from other channels are directed

to the subwoofer according to the speaker settings.

• Select FRNT if you do not use a subwoofer. LFE and

low frequency signals from other channels are directed

to the front speakers according to the speaker settings

(even if you have previously set front speakers to

SML).

• Select BOTH if you connect a subwoofer and you want

to output low-frequency signals from front channels to

both the front speakers and subwoofer. LFE and low-

frequency signals from other channels are also directed

to the subwoofer according to the speaker settings. Use

this function to reinforce low-frequency signals using

the subwoofer when playing back sources such as CDs.

Cross over CROSS OVER

Use this feature to select a cross-over (cut-off) frequency

for all low-frequency signals. All frequencies below the

selected frequency will be sent to the subwoofer.

Choices: 40Hz, 60Hz, 80Hz, 90Hz, 100Hz, 110Hz,

120Hz, 160Hz, 200Hz

Note

SMLx1)SMLx2

SURR B L/R SP

)NONEYES

PRESENCE SP

SWFRFRNT)BOTH

LFE/BASS OUT

FREQ;;;80Hz

CROSS OVER

00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 54 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM

English

SET MENU

ADVANCED

OPERATION

Subwoofer phase SUBWOOFER PHASE

If bass sounds are lacking or unclear, use this feature to

switch the phase of your subwoofer.

Choices: NORMAL (normal), REVERSE (reverse)

• Select NORMAL if you do not want to reverse the

phase of your subwoofer.

• Select REVERSE to reverse the phase of your

subwoofer.

■ Speaker level B)SPEAKER LEVEL

Use these settings to manually balance the speaker levels

between the front left or surround left speakers and each

speaker selected in SPEAKER SET (page 53).

Choices: –10.0 dB to +10.0 dB

• FR adjusts the balance of the front left and front right

speakers.

• C adjusts the balance of the front left and center

speakers.

• SL adjusts the balance of the front left and surround

left speakers.

• SBL

adjusts the balance of the surround left and

surround back left speakers.

• SBR

adjusts the balance of the surround left and

surround back right speakers.

• SR adjusts the balance of the surround left and

surround right speakers.

• SWFR adjusts the balance of the front left speaker and

subwoofer.

• PRES adjusts the balance of the front and presence

speakers.

SB will be displayed if you selected only one surround back

speaker in SURR B L/R SP (page 54).

To calibrate, use the test tone feature (see page 50).

■ Speaker distance C)SP DISTANCE

Use this feature to manually input the distance of each

speaker and adjust the delay applied to respective channel.

Ideally, each speaker should be the same distance from the

main listening position. However, this is not possible in

most home situations. Thus, a certain amount of delay

must be applied to the sound from each speaker so that all

sound will arrive at the listening position at the same time.

Unit UNIT

Choices: meters (m), feet (ft)

Initial setting:

U.S.A. and Canada models: feet (ft)

Other models: meters (m)

• Select meters to input speaker distances in meters.

• Select feet to input speaker distances in feet.

Speaker distances

Choices: 0.3 to 24.00 m (1 to 80 ft)

• FRONT L adjusts the distance of the front left speaker.

Initial setting: 3.0 m (10.0 ft)

• FRONT R adjusts the distance of the front right

speaker. Initial setting: 3.0 m (10.0 ft)

• CENTER adjusts the distance of the center speaker.

Initial setting: 3.0 m (10.0 ft)

• SURR L adjusts the distance of the surround left

speaker. Initial setting: 3.0 m (10.0 ft)

• SURR R adjusts the distance of the surround right

speaker. Initial setting: 3.0 m (10.0 ft)

• SB L

adjusts the distance of the surround back left

speaker. Initial setting: 2.10 m (7.0 ft)

• SB R

adjusts the distance of the surround back right

speaker. Initial setting: 2.10 m (7.0 ft)

• SWFR adjusts the distance of the subwoofer. Initial

setting: 3.0 m (10.0 ft)

• PRES L adjusts the distance of the presence left

speaker. Initial setting: 3.0 m (10.0 ft)

• PRES R adjusts the distance of the presence right

speaker. Initial setting: 3.0 m (10.0 ft)

SURR B will be displayed if you selected only one surround

back speaker in SURR B L/R SP (page 54).

)NORMALREVERSE

02ASUBWOOFER PHASE

-+

.FR

C

SL

B)SPEAKER

LEVEL

. UNIT;;;;;;meters

FRONTL;;;;3.00m

FRONTR;;;;3.00m

CENTER;;;;;3.00m

[]/[]:Up/Down

[<]/[>]:Adjust

C)SP

DISTANCE

00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 55 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM

SET MENU

■ Center graphic equalizer D)CENTER GEQ

Use this feature to adjust the built-in 5-band graphic

equalizer for the center channel so that the tonal quality of

the center speaker matches that of the front speakers.

You can make adjustments listening to the currently

selected source component or a test tone.

You can adjust 5 frequency bands: 100Hz, 300Hz, 1kHz,

3kHz, 10kHz

Choices: –6 to +6 dB

• Select ON to output test tones from the front left and

center speakers, and adjust the tonal quality of the

center speaker.

• Select OFF to stop the test tone and output the

currently selected source component.

• Press u / d to select a frequency band.

• Press j / i to adjust the selected frequency band.

■ Low-frequency effect level E)LFE LEVEL

Use to adjust the output level of the LFE (low-frequency

effect) channel according to the capacity of your

subwoofer or headphones. The LFE channel carries low-

frequency special effects which are only added to certain

scenes. This setting is effective only when this unit

decodes Dolby Digital or DTS signals.

Choices: –20 to 0 dB

Speaker SPEAKER

Select to adjust the speaker LFE level.

Headphone HEADPHONE

Select to adjust the headphone LFE level.

Depending on the settings of “LFE LEVEL”, some signals may

not be output from the SUB WOOFER OUTPUT jack.

■ Dynamic range F)DYNAMIC RANGE

Use to select the amount of dynamic range compression to

be applied to your speakers or headphones. This setting is

effective only when the unit is decoding Dolby Digital and

DTS signals.

Choices: MIN (minimum), STD (standard), MAX

(maximum)

Speaker SP

Select to adjust the speaker compression.

Headphone HP

Select to adjust the headphone compression.

• Select MIN if you regularly listen at low volume levels.

• Select STD for general use.

• Select MAX to preserve the greatest amount of

dynamic range.

■ Audio set G)AUDIO SET

Use to customize this units overall audio settings.

Audio mute AUDIO MUTE

Use to adjust how much the mute function reduces the

output volume.

Choices: MUTE, –20 dB

• Select MUTE to completely halt all output of sound.

• Select –20 dB to reduce the current volume by 20 dB.

Audio delay AUDIO DELAY

Use to delay the sound output and synchronize it with the

video image. This may be necessary when using certain

LCD monitors or projectors.

Choices: 0 to 160 mS

Note

.TEST)OFFON

-+

100Hz0dB

300Hz0dB

1kHz0dB

3kHz0dB

10kHz0dB

[]/[]:Up/Down

[<]/[>]:Adjust

D)CENTER GEQ

.SPEAKER;;;;;;0dB

HEADPHONE;;;;0dB

[]/[]:Up/Down

[<]/[>]:Adjust

E)LFE

LEVEL

.SP:MINSTD)MAX

HP:MINSTD)MAX

[]/[]:Up/Down

[<]/[>]:Select

F)DYNAMIC RANGE

.AUDIOMUTE;;MUTE

AUDIODELAY;;0ms

DIALG.LIFT;;;OFF

[]/[]:Up/Down

[<]/[>]:Selet

G)AUDIO SET

00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 56 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM

English

SET MENU

ADVANCED

OPERATION

Dialog lift DIALG.LIFT

Use to turn on and off the DIALG.LIFT parameter (see

page 72). This parameter adjusts the height of the front

and center channel sounds (dialog, vocals, etc.) by

assigning some of the front and center channel elements to

the presence speakers.

Choices: OFF, ON

• Select OFF to turn off DIALG.LIFT effect.

• Select ON to turn on DIALG.LIFT effect.

“DIALG.LIFT” appears only when “PRESENCE SP” is set

YES (see page 54).

■ Presence/surround back channel select

H)PR/SB SELECT

You can select to prioritize either the surround back or

presence speakers when playing sources that contain

surround back channel signals using CINEMA DSP sound

field programs.

Choices: PRch, SBch

• Select PRch to use presence speakers even when

surround back channel signals are input. The signals

for the surround back channel will be output from

surround speakers.

• Select SBch to use surround back speakers when a

surround back channel signal is detected in a CINEMA

DSP program. Presence channel signals will be output

from front speakers.

Use to reassign digital input/outputs and select the input

mode.

■ Input/output assignment A)I/O

ASSIGNMENT

You can assign jacks according to the component to be

used if this unit’s initial settings do not correspond to your

needs. Change the following parameters to reassign the

respective jacks and effectively connect more components.

Once the inputs have been reassigned, you can select the

corresponding component by using INPUT on the front

panel or the input selector buttons on the remote control.

For COMPONENT VIDEO jacks A and B

Choices: DVD, V-AUX, DTV/CBL, VCR 1, DVR/VCR2

For OPTICAL OUTPUT jack 1

Choices: MD/CD-R, CD, V-AUX, DTV/CBL, VCR 1,

DVD, DVR/VCR2

For OPTICAL INPUT jacks 2, 3 and 4

Choices: CD, DTV/CBL, VCR 1, DVD, DVR/VCR2,

MD/CD-R

Note

PRch)SBch

[]/[]:Select

[SELECT]:Return



H)PR/SB



SELECT

2 INPUT MENU

.A)I/OASSIGNMENT

B)INPUTMODE

[]/[]:Up/Down

[SELECT]:Enter





INPUT



.[A];;;;;DVD

(DVD)

[B];;;;;DTV/CBL

(DTV/CBL)



CMPNT-V



INPUT

.(1);;;;;MD/CD-R

(MD/CD-R )



OPTICAL



OUT

.(2);;;;;MD/CD-R

(MD/CD-R)

(3);;;;; DVD

(DVD )

(4);;;;;DTV/CBL

(DTV/CBL )



OPTICAL



00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 57 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM

SET MENU

For COAXIAL INPUT jacks 5 and 6

Choices: CD, V-AUX, DTV/CBL, VCR 1, MD/CD-R,

DVD, DVR/VCR2

• You cannot select a specific item more than once for the same

type of jack.

• When you connect a component to both the COAXIAL and

OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to the input signals from the

COAXIAL jack.

■ Input mode B)INPUT MODE

Use this feature to designate the input mode for sources

connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn on

this unit (see page 36 for details about the input mode).

Choices: AUTO, LAST

• Select AUTO to allow this unit to automatically detect

the type of input signal and select the appropriate input

mode.

• Select LAST to set this unit to automatically select the

last input mode used for that source.

Even if LAST is selected, the last setting for the EX/ES button

will not be recalled.

Use to adjust the optional system parameters.

■ Display set A)DISPLAY SET

Dimmer DIMMER

Use to adjust the brightness of the front panel display.

Choices: –4 to 0

Video conversion V CONV.

Use this feature to turn on/off conversion of composite

(VIDEO) signals to S-Video signals. This allows you to

output converted video signals from the S VIDEO jacks

when no S-Video signals are input.

Choices: ON, OFF

• Select OFF not to convert any signals.

• Select ON to convert composite signals to S-Video

signals.

Converted video signals are only output to the MONITOR OUT

jacks. When recording you must make the same type of video

connections (i.e., S-Video) between each component.

OSD shift OSD SHIFT

Use to adjust the vertical position of the OSD.

Choices: +5 (downward) to –5 (upward)

• Press + to lower the position of the OSD.

• Press – to raise the position of the OSD.

Gray back GRAY BACK

Selecting AUTO for the on-screen display setting displays

a gray background when there’s no video signal input.

Nothing is displayed if OFF is selected.

Choices: AUTO, OFF

If “GRAY BACK” is set to OFF, no information will be displayed

on the screen when video signals are not being input.

Notes

Note

.(5);;;;; CD

(CD)

(6);;;;; DVD

(DVD )



COAXIAL



)AUTOLAST

[<]/[>]:Select

[SELECT]:Return



B)INPUT



MODE

3 OPTION MENU

Note

.A)DISPLAYSET

B)MEMORYGUARD

C)PARAM.INI

D)ZONESET

[]/[]:Up/Down

[SELECT]:Enter





OPTION



MENU1/2

.DIMMER;;;;;;;;;0

VCONV;;;;;;;;ON

OSDSHIFT;;;;;;0

GRAYBACK;;;AUTO

[]/[]:Up/Down

[<]/[>]:sELECT



A)DISPLAY



SET

00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 58 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM

English

SET MENU

ADVANCED

OPERATION

■ Memory guard B)MEMORY GUARD

Use this feature to prevent accidental changes to DSP

program parameter values and other system settings.

Choices: OFF, ON

Select ON to protect:

• DSP program parameters

• All SET MENU items

• All speaker levels

• The on-screen display (OSD) mode

When “MEMORY GUARD” is set to ON, you cannot use the test

tone or select any other SET MENU items.

■ Parameter initialization C)PARAM. INI

Use this feature to initialize the parameters for each sound

field

program within a sound field program group. When

you initialize a sound field program group, all of the

parameter values within that group revert to their initial

settings.

Press the corresponding numeric button for the sound

field

program that you want to initialize.

An asterisk (*) next to a program number means that the

parameter values have been changed from their initial

settings.

• You cannot automatically revert to the previous parameter

settings once you initialize a

sound field program group.

• You cannot separately initialize individual

sound field

programs.

• You cannot initialize any program groups when “MEMORY

GUARD” is set to ON.

■ Zone set D)ZONE SET

Use to specify the location of speakers connected to the

SPEAKERS B terminals.

Speaker B set SP B

Use this feature to select the location of the front speakers

connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals.

Choices: FRONT, ZONE B

• Select FRONT to turn on/off SPEAKERS A and B

when the speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B

terminals are set in the main room.

• Select ZONE B if the speakers connected to the

SPEAKERS B terminals are set in another room. If

SPEAKERS A is turned OFF and SPEAKERS B is

turned ON, all the speakers including the subwoofer in

the main room are muted and the unit outputs sound

from SPEAKERS B only.

• If you connect headphones to the PHONES jack on the unit

when “SP B” is set to ZONE B, the sound is output from both

headphones and SPEAKERS B.

• If a DSP program is selected when “SP B” is set to ZONE B,

the unit automatically enters the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode.

■ Zone 2 setting E)ZONE2 SET

(U.S.A., Canada and Australia models only)

Zone 2 amplifier ZONE2 AMP

Use to select how the ZONE 2 speakers will be amplified.

Choices: ON, OFF

• Select OFF if you do not use Zone 2 speakers or if you

connect your Zone 2 speakers through an external

amplifiers connected to this unit’s ZONE 2 OUTPUT

jacks.

• Select ON to use this unit’s internal amplifier if you

connect your Zone 2 speakers directly to this unit’s

PRESENCE/ZONE 2 speaker terminals.

Note

Notes

)OFFON

[<]/[>]:Select

[SELECT]:Return



B)MEMORY



GUARD

1234

567*8

9



C)PARAM.



INI

Notes

SPB;;;;;;FRONT

[<]/[>]:Select

[SELECT]:Return



D)ZONE



SET

/ : Up/Down

-/+ : Select

ZONE2 AMP;;;OFF

E)ZONE2 SET

00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 59 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

In addition to controlling this unit, the remote control can also operate other A/V components made by YAMAHA and

other manufacturers. To control other components, you must set up remote control with the appropriate manufacturer

codes.

■ Controlling this unit

The shaded areas below can be used to control this unit

when the AMP mode is selected. Press AMP to activate

the AMP mode.

■ Controlling other components

The shaded areas below can be used to control other

components. Each button has a different function

depending on the selected component. Select the

component you want to control by pressing an input

selector button.

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

Control area

TRANSMITCODE SET

STANDBY

SYSTEM

POWER

MD/CD-R

TUNER

V-A UX

DVD

AMP

POWERPOWER

REC

AUDIO

MUTE

MENUTITLE

VOLUME

DISC SKIP

SET MENU

LEVEL

A/B/C/D/E

TEST

ON SCREEN

STRAIGHT

ROCKJAZZHALLSTEREO

4321

ENTER

MOVIETV THTRMUSIC ENTERTAIN

EX/ESNIGHTq/DTS

EFFECT

DISPLAYRETURN

TV MUTE TV INPUT

TV VOL TV CH

AVTV

SELECT

VCR 1 DVR/VCR2

DTV/CBL

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

PRESET/CH

The buttons in the

dotted lines

(SYSTEM

POWER,

STANDBY,

SLEEP, MULTI CH

IN, VOLUME +/–

and MUTE)

function in any

mode.

Press AMP

to control

this unit.

TRANSMITCODE SET

STANDBY

SYSTEM

POWER

MD/CD-R

TUNER

V-A UX

DVD

AMP

POWERPOWER

REC

AUDIO

MUTE

MENUTITLE

VOLUME

DISC SKIP

SET MENU

LEVEL

A/B/C/D/E

TEST

ON SCREEN

STRAIGHT

ROCKJAZZHALLSTEREO

4321

ENTER

MOVIETV THTRMUSIC ENTERTAIN

EX/ESNIGHTq/DTS

EFFECT

DISPLAYRETURN

TV MUTE TV INPUT

TV VOL TV CH

AVTV

SELECT

VCR 1 DVR/VCR2

DTV/CBL

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

PRESET/CH

REC

AUDIO

MENUTITLE

DISC SKIP

SET MENU

LEVEL

A/B/C/D/E

TEST

STRAIGHT

ROCKJAZZHALLSTEREO

4321

ENTER

MOVIETV THTRMUSIC ENTERTAIN

EX/ESNIGHTq/DTS

EFFECT

DISPLAYRETURN

TV MUTE TV INPUT

TV VOL TV CH

SELECT

PRESET/CH

REC

AUDIO

MENUTITLE

DISC SKIP

SET MENU

LEVEL

A/B/C/D/E

TEST

STRAIGHT

ROCKJAZZHALLSTEREO

4321

ENTER

MOVIETV THTRMUSIC ENTERTAIN

EX/ESNIGHTq/DTS

EFFECT

DISPLAYRETURN

TV MUTE TV INPUT

TV VOL TV CH

SELECT

PRESET/CH

REC

AUDIO

MENUTITLE

DISC SKIP

SET MENU

LEVEL

A/B/C/D/E

TEST

STRAIGHT

ROCKJAZZHALLSTEREO

4321

ENTER

MOVIETV THTRMUSIC ENTERTAIN

EX/ESNIGHTq/DTS

EFFECT

DISPLAYRETURN

TV MUTE TV INPUT

TV VOL TV CH

SELECT

PRESET/CH

REC

AUDIO

MENUTITLE

DISC SKIP

SET MENU

LEVEL

A/B/C/D/E

TEST

STRAIGHT

ROCKJAZZHALLSTEREO

4321

ENTER

MOVIETV THTRMUSIC ENTERTAIN

EX/ESNIGHTq/DTS

EFFECT

DISPLAYRETURN

TV MUTE TV INPUT

TV VOL TV CH

SELECT

PRESET/CH

REC

AUDIO

MENUTITLE

DISC SKIP

SET MENU

LEVEL

A/B/C/D/E

TEST

STRAIGHT

ROCKJAZZHALLSTEREO

4321

ENTER

MOVIETV THTRMUSIC ENTERTAIN

EX/ESNIGHTq/DTS

EFFECT

DISPLAYRETURN

TV MUTE TV INPUT

TV VOL TV CH

SELECT

PRESET/CH

REC

AUDIO

MENUTITLE

DISC SKIP

SET MENU

LEVEL

A/B/C/D/E

TEST

STRAIGHT

ROCKJAZZHALLSTEREO

4321

ENTER

MOVIETV THTRMUSIC ENTERTAIN

EX/ESNIGHTq/DTS

EFFECT

DISPLAYRETURN

TV MUTE TV INPUT

TV VOL TV CH

SELECT

PRESET/CH

REC

AUDIO

MENUTITLE

DISC SKIP

SET MENU

LEVEL

A/B/C/D/E

TEST

STRAIGHT

ROCKJAZZHALLSTEREO

4321

ENTER

MOVIETV THTRMUSIC ENTERTAIN

EX/ESNIGHTq/DTS

EFFECT

DISPLAYRETURN

TV MUTE TV INPUT

TV VOL TV CH

SELECT

PRESET/CH

REC

AUDIO

MENUTITLE

DISC SKIP

SET MENU

LEVEL

A/B/C/D/E

TEST

STRAIGHT

ROCKJAZZHALLSTEREO

4321

ENTER

MOVIETV THTRMUSIC ENTERTAIN

EX/ESNIGHTq/DTS

EFFECT

DISPLAYRETURN

TV MUTE TV INPUT

TV VOL TV CH

SELECT

PRESET/CH

REC

AUDIO

MENUTITLE

DISC SKIP

SET MENU

LEVEL

A/B/C/D/E

TEST

STRAIGHT

ROCKJAZZHALLSTEREO

4321

ENTER

MOVIETV THTRMUSIC ENTERTAIN

EX/ESNIGHTq/DTS

EFFECT

DISPLAYRETURN

TV MUTE TV INPUT

TV VOL TV CH

SELECT

PRESET/CH

REC

AUDIO

MENUTITLE

DISC SKIP

SET MENU

LEVEL

A/B/C/D/E

TEST

STRAIGHT

ROCKJAZZHALLSTEREO

4321

ENTER

MOVIETV THTRMUSIC ENTERTAIN

EX/ESNIGHTq/DTS

EFFECT

DISPLAYRETURN

TV MUTE TV INPUT

TV VOL TV CH

SELECT

PRESET/CH

REC

AUDIO

MENUTITLE

DISC SKIP

SET MENU

LEVEL

A/B/C/D/E

TEST

ON SCREEN

STRAIGHT

ROCKJAZZHALLSTEREO

4321

ENTER

MOVIETV THTRMUSIC ENTERTAIN

EX/ESNIGHTq/DTS

EFFECT

DISPLAYRETURN

TV MUTE TV INPUT

TV VOL TV CH

SELECT

PRESET/CH

The button and input

selector buttons switch the

function of the component

control area below.

Use the button to

control other components

regardless of whether they

are connected to this unit.

Component control

area

You can control up to 9

different components by

setting appropriate

manufacturer codes (see

page 61).

00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 60 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM

English

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

ADVANCED

OPERATION

You can control other components by setting the

appropriate manufacturer codes. Codes can be set up for

each input area. For a complete list of available

manufacturer codes, refer to “LIST OF

MANUFACTURER CODES” at the end of this manual.

The following table shows the factory preset component

(Library: component category) and the manufacturer code

for each area.

U.K. and Europe models

Other models

You may not be able to operate your YAMAHA component even

if a YAMAHA manufacturer code is initially set as listed above.

In this case, try to set other YAMAHA manufacturer code(s).

1 Press an input selector button or to

select the component you want to set up.

2 Press CODE SET using a ballpoint pen or

similar object.

The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control

flashes twice.

3 Press the numeric buttons to enter the four

digit manufacturer’s code for the component

to be used.

Refer to “LIST OF MANUFACTURER CODES” at

the end of this manual.

The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control

flashes twice.

• If the manufacturer of your component has more than one code,

try each of them until you find the correct one.

• If you wait for more than 30 seconds during step 3, the setup

process is canceled. If this happens, start over from step 2.

Setting manufacturer codes

Input area

Component

Transcripción de documentos

RXV650_U_cv.fm Page 1 Thursday, January 15, 2004 3:28 PM U RX-V650 AV Receiver © 2004 YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A. YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, F.R. OF GERMANY YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA All rights reserved. OWNER’S MANUAL Printed in Malaysia WC85550 00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page i Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 10 CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. • Explanation of Graphical Symbols The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert you to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons. The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert you to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 i 11 Read Instructions – All the safety and operating instructions should be read before the product is operated. Retain Instructions – The safety and operating instructions should be retained for future reference. Heed Warnings – All warnings on the product and in the operating instructions should be adhered to. Follow Instructions – All operating and use instructions should be followed. Cleaning – Unplug this product from the wall outlet before cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners. Use a damp cloth for cleaning. Attachments – Do not use attachments not recommended by the product manufacturer as they may cause hazards. Water and Moisture – Do not use this product near water – for example, near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen sink, or laundry tub; in a wet basement; or near a swimming pool; and the like. Accessories – Do not place this product on an unstable cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table. The product may fall, causing serious injury to a child or adult, and serious damage to the product. Use only with a cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table recommended by the manufacturer, or sold with the product. Any mounting of the product should follow the manufacturer’s instructions, and should use a mounting accessory recommended by the manufacturer. A product and cart combination should be moved with care. Quick stops, excessive force, and uneven surfaces may cause the product and cart combination to overturn. 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 Ventilation – Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for ventilation and to ensure reliable operation of the product and to protect it from overheating, and these openings must not be blocked or covered. The openings should never be blocked by placing the product on a bed, sofa, rug, or other similar surface. This product should not be placed in a built-in installation such as a bookcase or rack unless proper ventilation is provided or the manufacturer’s instructions have been adhered to. Power Sources – This product should be operated only from the type of power source indicated on the marking label. If you are not sure of the type of power supply to your home, consult your product dealer or local power company. For products intended to operate from battery power, or other sources, refer to the operating instructions. Grounding or Polarization – This product may be equipped with a polarized alternating current line plug (a plug having one blade wider than the other). This plug will fit into the power outlet only one way. This is a safety feature. If you are unable to insert the plug fully into the outlet, try reversing the plug. If the plug should still fail to fit, contact your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized plug. Power-Cord Protection – Power-supply cords should be routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon or against them, paying particular attention to cords at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the product. Lightning – For added protection for this product during a lightning storm, or when it is left unattended and unused for long periods of time, unplug it from the wall outlet and disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will prevent damage to the product due to lightning and power-line surges. Power Lines – An outside antenna system should not be located in the vicinity of overhead power lines or other electric light or power circuits, or where it can fall into such power lines or circuits. When installing an outside antenna system, extreme care should be taken to keep from touching such power lines or circuits as contact with them might be fatal. Overloading – Do not overload wall outlets, extension cords, or integral convenience receptacles as this can result in a risk of fire or electric shock. Object and Liquid Entry – Never push objects of any kind into this product through openings as they may touch dangerous voltage points or short-out parts that could result in a fire or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind on the product. Servicing – Do not attempt to service this product yourself as opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous voltage or other hazards. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Damage Requiring Service – Unplug this product from the wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel under the following conditions: a) When the power-supply cord or plug is damaged, b) If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen into the product, c) If the product has been exposed to rain or water, 00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page ii Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS d) 20 21 22 23 If the product does not operate normally by following the operating instructions. Adjust only those controls that are covered by the operating instructions as an improper adjustment of other controls may result in damage and will often require extensive work by a qualified technician to restore the product to its normal operation, e) If the product has been dropped or damaged in any way, and f) When the product exhibits a distinct change in performance - this indicates a need for service. Replacement Parts – When replacement parts are required, be sure the service technician has used replacement parts specified by the manufacturer or have the same characteristics as the original part. Unauthorized substitutions may result in fire, electric shock, or other hazards. Safety Check – Upon completion of any service or repairs to this product, ask the service technician to perform safety checks to determine that the product is in proper operating condition. Wall or Ceiling Mounting – The unit should be mounted to a wall or ceiling only as recommended by the manufacturer. Heat – The product should be situated away from heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other products (including amplifiers) that produce heat. 24 Outdoor Antenna Grounding – If an outside antenna or cable system is connected to the product, be sure the antenna or cable system is grounded so as to provide some protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges. Article 810 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70, provides information with regard to proper grounding of the mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding conductors, location of antenna discharge unit, connection to grounding electrodes, and requirements for the grounding electrode. EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING MAST ANTENNA LEAD IN WIRE GROUND CLAMP ANTENNA DISCHARGE UNIT (NEC SECTION 810–20) ELECTRIC SERVICE EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS (NEC SECTION 810–21) GROUND CLAMPS Note to CATV system installer: This reminder is provided to call the CATV system installer’s attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC that provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be connected to the grounding system of the building, as close to the point of cable entry as practical. POWER SERVICE GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM (NEC ART 250. PART H) NEC – NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE FCC INFORMATION (for US customers) 1 IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT! This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product. 2 IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA. 3 NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures: Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference. Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s. In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to coaxial type cable. If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Electronics Corp., U.S.A. 6660 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA 90620. The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries. ii 00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page iii Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT. CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT. 1 To assure the finest performance, please read this manual carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference. 2 Install this sound system in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean place — away from direct sunlight, heat sources, vibration, dust, moisture, and/or cold. Allow ventilation space of at least 30 cm on the top, 20 cm on the left and right, and 20 cm on the back of this unit. 3 Locate this unit away from other electrical appliances, motors, or transformers to avoid humming sounds. 4 Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature changes from cold to hot, and do not locate this unit in a environment with high humidity (i.e. a room with a humidifier) to prevent condensation inside this unit, which may cause an electrical shock, fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. 5 Avoid installing this unit where foreign object may fall onto this unit and/or this unit may be exposed to liquid dripping or splashing. On the top of this unit, do not place: – Other components, as they may cause damage and/or discoloration on the surface of this unit. – Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. – Containers with liquid in them, as they may fall and liquid may cause electrical shock to the user and/or damage to this unit. 6 Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth, curtain, etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If the temperature inside this unit rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. 7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all connections are complete. 8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may overheat, possibly causing damage. 9 Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords. 10 When disconnecting the power cord from the wall outlet, grasp the plug; do not pull the cord. 11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this might damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth. 12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used. Using this unit with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. YAMAHA will not be held responsible for any damage resulting from use of this unit with a voltage other than specified. 13 To prevent damage by lightning, disconnect the power cord from the wall outlet during an electrical storm. 14 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact qualified YAMAHA service personnel when any service is needed. The cabinet should never be opened for any reasons. 15 When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time (i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet. 16 Be sure to read the “TROUBLESHOOTING” section on common operating errors before concluding that this unit is faulty. 17 Before moving this unit, press STANDBY/ON to set this unit in the standby mode, and disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet. 18 VOLTAGE SELECTOR (Asia and General models only) The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging into the AC main supply. Voltages are: Asia model ...................... 220/230-240 V AC, 50/60 Hz General model .. 110/120/220/230-240 V AC, 50/60 Hz WARNING TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE. This unit is not disconnected from the AC power source as long as it is connected to the wall outlet, even if this unit itself is turned off. This state is called the standby mode. In this state, this unit is designed to consume a very small quantity of power. FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS To prevent electric shock, match wide blade of plug to wide slot and fully insert. This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. IMPORTANT Please record the serial number of this unit in the space below. MODEL: Serial No.: The serial number is located on the rear of the unit. Retain this Owner’s Manual in a safe place for future reference. We Want You Listening For A Lifetime YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries Association's Consumer Electronics Group want you to get the most out of your equipment by playing it at a safe level. One that lets the sound come through loud and clear without annoying blaring or distortion - and, most importantly, without affecting your sensitive hearing. iii Since hearing damage from loud sounds is often undetectable until it is too late, YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group recommend you to avoid prolonged exposure from excessive volume levels. 00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 1 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM CONTENTS INTRODUCTION INTRODUCTION SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS FEATURES............................................................. 2 GETTING STARTED............................................ 3 SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS...............................................44 Supplied accessories .................................................. 3 Installing batteries in the remote control ................... 3 For movie/video sources.......................................... 44 For music sources .................................................... 47 CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS ......................... 4 PREPARATION ADVANCED OPERATION PREPARATION Front panel ................................................................. 4 Remote control........................................................... 6 Using the remote control ........................................... 7 Front panel display .................................................... 8 Rear panel ................................................................ 10 ADVANCED OPERATIONS ..............................48 Selecting the OSD mode.......................................... 48 Using the sleep timer ............................................... 48 Manually adjusting speaker levels........................... 49 Using the test tone ................................................... 50 SET MENU ............................................................51 SPEAKER SETUP ............................................... 11 Speaker placement ................................................... 11 Speaker connections ................................................ 12 Before connecting components................................ 15 Connecting video components................................. 16 Connecting audio components................................. 19 Connecting the antennas .......................................... 21 Connecting the power supply cord .......................... 22 Turning on the power............................................... 24 AUTO SETUP....................................................... 25 REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ...................60 Control area ............................................................. 60 Setting manufacturer codes...................................... 61 Controlling other components ................................. 62 Clearing setup manufacturer codes.......................... 63 ZONE 2 (U.S.A., Canada and Australia models only) .......................................................64 Zone 2 connections .................................................. 64 Remote controlling Zone 2 ...................................... 65 SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS Introduction.............................................................. 25 Optimizer microphone setup.................................... 25 Starting the setup ..................................................... 26 BASIC OPERATION CONNECTIONS .................................................. 15 Using SET MENU................................................... 52 1 SOUND MENU.................................................... 53 2 INPUT MENU...................................................... 57 3 OPTION MENU................................................... 58 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION BASIC OPERATION EDITING SOUND FIELD PARAMETERS ......67 PLAYBACK.......................................................... 30 Basic operations....................................................... 30 Selecting sound field programs ............................... 32 Selecting input modes.............................................. 36 TUNING ................................................................ 38 RECORDING ....................................................... 43 SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS...............................................69 TROUBLESHOOTING .......................................73 RESETTING THE FACTORY PRESETS ........78 GLOSSARY...........................................................79 ADVANCED OPERATION Automatic and manual tuning.................................. 38 Presetting stations .................................................... 39 Selecting preset stations........................................... 41 Exchanging preset stations ...................................... 42 What is a sound field ............................................... 67 Changing parameter settings ................................... 67 Audio formats .......................................................... 79 Sound field programs............................................... 80 Audio information ................................................... 80 Video signal information ......................................... 81 SPECIFICATIONS...............................................82 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION English 1 00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 2 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM FEATURES FEATURES Built-in 7-channel power amplifier Other features ◆ Minimum RMS output power (0.06% THD, 20 Hz – 20 kHz, 8Ω) Front: 95 W + 95 W Center: 95 W Surround: 95 W + 95 W Surround back: 95 W + 95 W ◆ YPAO: YAMAHA Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer for automatic speaker setup ◆ 192-kHz/24-bit D/A converter ◆ A SET MENU which provides you with items for optimizing this unit for your audio/video system ◆ 8 additional input jacks for discrete multi-channel input ◆ PURE DIRECT for pure fidelity sound with analog and PCM sources ◆ On-screen display function helpful in controlling this unit ◆ S-Video signal input/output capability ◆ Component video input/output capability ◆ Video signal conversion (Composite video ↔ S-Video) capability for monitor out ◆ Optical and coaxial digital audio signal jacks ◆ Sleep timer ◆ Cinema and music night listening modes ◆ Remote control with preset manufacturer codes ◆ Zone 2 custom installation facility (U.S.A., Canada and Australia models only) Sound field features ◆ Proprietary YAMAHA technology for the creation of sound fields ◆ Dolby Digital/Dolby Digital EX decoder ◆ DTS/DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, Discrete 6.1, DTS Neo:6, DTS 96/24 decoder ◆ Dolby Pro Logic/Dolby Pro Logic II/Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder ◆ Virtual CINEMA DSP ◆ SILENT CINEMA™ Sophisticated AM/FM tuner ◆ 40-station random access preset tuning ◆ Automatic preset tuning ◆ Preset station shifting capability (preset editing) • y indicates a tip for your operation. • Some operations can be performed by using either the buttons on the main unit or on the remote control. In cases when the button names differ between the main unit and the remote control, the button name on the remote control is given in parentheses. • This manual is printed prior to production. Design and specifications are subject to change in part as a result of improvements, etc. In case of differences between the manual and product, the product has priority. Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, “Surround EX”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. “SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of YAMAHA CORPORATION. 2 “DTS”, “DTS-ES”, “Neo:6” and “DTS 96/24” are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. 00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 3 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM GETTING STARTED GETTING STARTED INTRODUCTION Supplied accessories Please check that you received all of the following parts. Remote control CODE SET Batteries (4) (AAA, R03, UM-4) AM loop antenna TRANSMIT 75-ohm/300-ohm antenna adapter (U.K. model only) SYSTEM POWER TV POWER STANDBY POWER AV CD MD/CD-R TUNER SLEEP DVD DTV/CBL V-AUX MULTI CH IN VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 AMP TV VOL TV CH TV MUTE TV INPUT STEREO HALL JAZZ 1 2 3 4 MUSIC ENTERTAIN TV THTR MOVIE 5 6 7 8 q/DTS NIGHT EX/ES STRAIGHT 9 0 VOLUME MUTE 10 ROCK Indoor FM antenna (U.S.A., Canada, China, Asia and General models) ENTER EFFECT PRESET/CH LEVEL TITLE Indoor FM antenna (U.K., Europe, Australia and Korea models) Optimizer microphone SET MENU MENU A/B/C/D/E SELECT ON SCREEN TEST RETURN DISPLAY REC AUDIO DISC SKIP FREQ/RDS MODE PTY SEEK START EON Installing batteries in the remote control 2 1 3 Notes on batteries • Change all of the batteries if you notice the following conditions; the operation range of the remote control decreases, the indicator does not flash or its light becomes dim. • Do not use old batteries together with new ones. • Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline and manganese batteries) together. Read the packaging carefully as these different types of batteries may have the same shape and color. • If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them immediately. Avoid touching the leaked material or letting it come into contact with clothing, etc. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before installing new batteries. If the remote control is without batteries for more than 2 minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the remote control, the contents of the memory may be cleared. When the memory is cleared, insert new batteries, set up the manufacturer code and program any acquired functions that may have been cleared. Press the part and slide the battery compartment cover off. 2 Insert four supplied batteries (AAA, R03, UM-4) according to the polarity markings (+ and –) on the inside of the battery compartment. 3 Slide the cover back until it snaps into place. English 1 3 00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 4 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Front panel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 (U.S.A. model) VOLUME OPTIMIZER MIC PRESET/TUNING FM/AM EDIT A/B/C/D/E l PRESET/TUNING h MEMORY TUNING MODE NEXT LEVEL MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO PROGRAM INPUT PHONES SPEAKERS A B STRAIGHT TONE CONTROL MULTI CH INPUT INPUT MODE PURE DIRECT STANDBY /ON VIDEO AUX EFFECT SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO VIDEO RDS MODE/FREQ L AUDIO R OPTICAL EON PTY SEEK MODE START A B CD E F G H I J K LM NO (U.K. and Europe models only) 1 STANDBY/ON Turns on this unit or sets it to the standby mode. When you turn on this unit, you will hear a click and there will be a 4 to 5-second delay before this unit can reproduce sound. Note In standby mode, this unit consumes a small amount of power in order to receive infrared-signals from the remote control. 2 OPTIMIZER MIC jack Use to connect and input audio signals from the supplied microphone for use with the AUTO SETUP function (see page 25). 3 Remote control sensor Receives signals from the remote control. 4 Front panel display Shows information about the operational status of this unit. 5 A/B/C/D/E (NEXT) Selects one of the 5 preset station groups (A to E) when the unit is in tuner mode. Selects the speaker channel to be adjusted when the unit is not in tuner mode. 4 6 PRESET/TUNING l / h (LEVEL –/+) Selects preset station number 1 to 8 when the colon (:) is displayed next to the band indication in the front panel display when the unit is in tuner mode. Selects the tuning frequency when the colon (:) is not displayed. Adjusts the level of the speaker channel selected using A/B/C/D/E (NEXT) when the unit is not in tuner mode. 7 MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) Stores a station in the memory. Hold down this button for more than 3 seconds to start automatic preset tuning. 8 TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO) Switches the tuning mode between automatic (AUTO indicator on) and manual (AUTO indicator off). 9 VIDEO AUX jacks Input audio and video signals from a portable external source such as a game console. To reproduce source signals from these jacks, select V-AUX as the input source. 0 VOLUME Controls the output level of all audio channels. This does not affect the REC OUT level. 00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 5 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS B SPEAKERS A/B Turns on or off the set of front speakers connected to the A and/or B terminals on the rear panel each time the corresponding button is pressed. C PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) Switches the function of PRESET/TUNING l / h (LEVEL –/+) between selecting preset station numbers and tuning. D STRAIGHT (EFFECT) Switches the sound fields off or on. When STRAIGHT is selected, input signals (2-channel or multi-channel) are output directly from their respective speakers without effect processing. ■ U.K. and Europe models only L RDS MODE/FREQ Press this button when the unit is receiving an RDS station to cycle the display between the PS mode, PTY mode, RT mode, CT mode (if the station offers those RDS data services) and/or the frequency display. M PTY SEEK MODE Press this button to set the unit to the PTY SEEK mode. N PTY SEEK START Press this button to begin searching for a station after the desired program type has been selected in the PTY SEEK mode. INTRODUCTION A PHONES (SILENT CINEMA) jack Outputs audio signals for private listening with headphones. When you connect headphones, no signals are output to the OUTPUT jacks or to the speakers. All Dolby Digital and DTS audio signals are mixed down to the left and right headphone channels. O EON Press this button to select a radio program type (NEWS, INFO, AFFAIRS, SPORT) to tune in automatically. E FM/AM Switches the reception band between FM and AM. F PROGRAM Use to select sound field programs or adjust the bass/treble balance (in conjunction with TONE CONTROL). G TONE CONTROL Use to adjust the bass/treble balance for the front left and right, center, presence and subwoofer channels (see page 31). H INPUT MODE Sets the priority (AUTO, DTS, ANALOG) for the type of signals received when one component is connected to two or more of this unit’s input jacks (see page 36). I INPUT selector Selects the input source you want to listen to or watch. J MULTI CH INPUT Selects the source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. When selected, the MULTI CH INPUT source takes priority over the source selected with INPUT (or the input selector buttons on the remote control). K PURE DIRECT Turns on or off PURE DIRECT mode (see page 35). English 5 00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 6 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Remote control This section describes the function of each control on the remote control used to control this unit. To operate other components, see “REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES” on page 60. 1 2 3 9 CODE SET TRANSMIT SYSTEM STANDBY POWER MD/CD-R TUNER SLEEP DVD DTV/CBL V-AUX MULTI CH IN VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 TV VOL TV CH TV MUTE TV INPUT POWER POWER TV AV CD 0 A AMP B C D E VOLUME F MUTE 4 STEREO HALL JAZZ 1 2 3 4 MUSIC ENTERTAIN TV THTR MOVIE 5 6 7 8 q/DTS NIGHT EX/ES STRAIGHT 9 0 5 6 10 ENTER EFFECT PRESET/CH LEVEL TITLE SET MENU MENU A/B/C/D/E 7 8 ROCK G H I TEST ON SCREEN DISPLAY J REC AUDIO DISC SKIP FREQ/RDS MODE PTY SEEK START EON 4 Sound field program / numeric buttons (1 - 8) Use to select sound field programs. Use numbers 1 through 8 to select preset stations when the unit is in tuner mode. 5 NIGHT Turns on or off the night listening modes (see page 35). 6 LEVEL Selects the speaker channel to be adjusted and sets the level. 7 Cursor buttons u / d / j / i / SELECT Use to select and adjust sound field program parameters or SET MENU items. Press u / d to select preset station numbers when the unit is in tuner mode. 8 TEST (RETURN) Outputs the test tone to adjust the speaker levels. Returns to the previous menu level when adjusting the SET MENU parameters. 9 TRANSMIT indicator Flashes while the remote control is sending signals. 0 STANDBY Sets this unit in the standby mode. A SYSTEM POWER Turns on the power of this unit. SELECT RETURN 3 Input selector buttons Select the input source and change the control area. K B SLEEP Sets the sleep timer. C MULTI CH IN Selects MULTI CH INPUT when using an external decoder (etc.). D AMP Selects the AMP mode. You must select the AMP mode to control the main unit. E VOLUME –/+ Increases or decreases the volume level. 1 Infrared window Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the component you want to operate. 2 CODE SET Use to set up manufacturer codes (see page 61). 6 F MUTE Mutes the sound. Press again to restore the audio output to the previous volume level. 00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 7 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Using the remote control The remote control transmits a directional infrared beam. Be sure to aim the remote control directly at the remote control sensor on the main unit during operation. H EX/ES Switches between 5.1 or 6.1/7.1-channel playback of multi-channel software. VOLUME I SET MENU (A/B/C/D/E) Activates the SET MENU function. Selects preset station groups when the unit is in tuner mode. J ON SCREEN Selects the display mode of the on-screen display (OSD) this unit sends to your video monitor. OPTIMIZER MIC PRESET/TUNING FM/AM EDIT A/B/C/D/E l PRESET/TUNING h MEMORY TUNING MODE NEXT LEVEL MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO PROGRAM INTRODUCTION G STRAIGHT (EFFECT) Switches the sound fields off or on. When STRAIGHT is selected, input signals (2-channel or multi-channel) are output directly from their respective speakers without effect processing. INPUT PHONES STRAIGHT SPEAKERS A B TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE MULTI CH INPUT PURE DIRECT STANDBY /ON VIDEO AUX EFFECT SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO 30 30 CODE SET VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL Approximately 6 m (20 ft) TRANSMIT SYSTEM POWER POWER STANDBY POWER TV CD DVD AV MD/CD-R TUNER SLEEP DTV/CBL V-AUX MULTI CH IN VCR AMP TV VOL TV CH TV MUTE TV INPUT VOLUME MUTE STEREO HALL JAZZ 1 2 3 MUSIC ENTERTAINTV THTR 5 6 q/DTS NIGHT 9 0 7 ROCK 4 MOVIE 8 EX/ES STRAIGHT 10 ENTER EFFECT LEVEL PRESET/CH TITLE SET MENU MENU A/B/C/D/E SELECT TEST ■ U.K. and Europe models only RETURN DISPLAY REC AUDIO DISC SKIP K RDS tuning buttons FREQ/RDS Press this button when the unit is receiving an RDS station to cycle the display between the PS mode, PTY mode, RT mode, CT mode (if the station offers those RDS data services) and/or the frequency display. EON Press this button to select a radio program type (NEWS, INFO, AFFAIRS, SPORT) to tune in automatically. PTY SEEK MODE Press this button to set the unit to the PTY SEEK mode. ■ Handling the remote control • Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote control. • Do not drop the remote control. • Do not leave or store the remote control in the following types of conditions: – high humidity such as near a bath – high temperature such as near a heater or stove – extremely low temperatures – dusty places PTY SEEK START Press this button to begin searching for a station after the desired program type has been selected in the PTY SEEK mode. English 7 00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 8 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Front panel display 1 2 t 96 24 q EX q PL q PL q PL x DVR/VCR2 3 VCR-1 SILENT CINEMA MATRIX DISCRETE VIRTUAL SP AB q DIGITAL 4 5 V-AUX 6 DTV/CBL 78 MD/CD-R DVD NIGHT ZONE2 90 TUNER CD HiFi DSP SLEEP PS TUNED STEREO MEMORY MUTE VOLUME OPTIMIZER PTY RT CT EON dB ft mS dB D E H F G O (U.S.A., Canada and Australia models only) 1 Decoder indicators When any of this unit’s decoders function, the respective indicator lights up. 2 SILENT CINEMA indicator Lights up when headphones are connected and a sound field program is selected (see page 31). 3 NIGHT indicator Lights up when you select night listening mode. 4 Input source indicators A cursor lights to show the current input source. 5 Sound field indicators Light to indicate the active DSP sound fields. Presence DSP sound field Listening position Left surround DSP sound field Right surround DSP sound field Surround back DSP sound field 6 CINEMA DSP indicator Lights up when you select a CINEMA DSP sound field program. 7 AUTO indicator Lights up when this unit is in automatic tuning mode. 8 TUNED indicator Lights up when this unit is tuned into a station. 9 STEREO indicator Lights up when this unit is receiving a strong signal for an FM stereo broadcast while the AUTO indicator is lit. 8 B PTY HOLD AUTO PCM C A 96/24 L C R LFE SL SB SR J KLM I P N (U.K. and Europe models only) 0 MEMORY indicator Blinks to show that a station can be stored. A MUTE indicator Blinks while the MUTE function is on. B VOLUME level indication Indicates the volume level. C PCM indicator Lights up when this unit is reproducing PCM (pulse code modulation) digital audio signals. D VIRTUAL indicator Lights up when Virtual CINEMA DSP is active (see page 36). E Headphones indicator Lights up when headphones are connected. F SP A B indicators Light up according to the set of front speakers selected. Both indicators light up when both sets of speakers are selected. G SLEEP indicator Lights up while the sleep timer is on. H HiFi DSP indicator Lights up when you select a HiFi DSP sound field program. I Multi-information display Shows the current sound field program name and other information when adjusting or changing settings. J OPTIMIZER indicator Lights up during the auto setup procedure and when the auto setup speaker settings are used without any modifications. 00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 9 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS K 96/24 indicator Lights up when a DTS 96/24 signal is input to this unit. INTRODUCTION L LFE indicator Lights up when the input signal contains the LFE signal. M Input channel indicators Indicate the channel components of the current digital input signal. N Presence and surround back speaker indicators Indicate the connection of presence and/or surround back speakers when using the SPEAKER LEVEL setting (see page 55). O ZONE 2 indicator (U.S.A., Canada and Australia models only) Lights up when Zone 2 power is on. P RDS indicators (U.K. and Europe models only) The name(s) of the RDS data offered by the currently received RDS station light(s) up. EON lights up when an RDS station that offers the EON data service is being received. PTY HOLD lights up while searching for stations in the PTY SEEK mode. English 9 00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 10 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Rear panel 1 2 3 4 COMPONENT VIDEO PR PB 5 6 7 8 TUNER Y 75Ω UNBAL. DVD FM ANT GND AM ANT DTV /CBL AUDIO VIDEO AUDIO VIDEO DIGITAL INPUT S VIDEO REMOTE MONITOR OUT DVD DVD CD ZONE 2 PRE OUT CENTER COAXIAL IN CD OUT OUT IN (REC) VCR 1 FRONT DVD MD/CD-R FRONT SURROUND SUB WOOFER SURROUND SPEAKERS IN A DVR/ VCR 2 SURROUND B OUT MD/CD-R OPTICAL FRONT SUB WOOFER CENTER MULTI CH INPUT ZONE 2 OUT +12V 15mA MAX. PRESENCE /ZONE 2 SURROUND BACK OUT SURROUND BACK DIGITAL OUTPUT SWITCHED CONTROL OUT MD /CD-R OPTICAL DTV/CBL AC OUTLETS IN DTV /CBL (PLAY) CENTER SURROUND BACK VIDEO S VIDEO MONITOR OUT IMPEDANCE SELECTOR (U.S.A. model) 9 0 A B C D 1 DIGITAL INPUT jacks See pages 16, 18 and 19 for details. 9 DIGITAL OUTPUT jack See page 19 for details. 2 Audio component jacks See page 19 for connection information. 0 MULTI CH INPUT jacks See page 17 for connection information. 3 Video component jacks See pages 16 and 18 for connection information. A ZONE 2 OUTPUT jacks (U.S.A., Canada and Australia models only) See page 64 for details. 4 Antenna terminals See page 21 for connection information. 5 PRESENCE/ZONE 2 speaker terminals (U.S.A., Canada and Australia models) PRESENCE speaker terminals (other models) See page 13 for connection information. B PRE OUT jacks See page 20 for connection information. C Speaker terminals See page 13 for connection information. D IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch See page 23. 6 REMOTE IN/OUT jacks (U.S.A., Canada and Australia models only) See page 64 for details. < Asia and General models only > 7 CONTROL OUT jack (U.S.A., Canada and Australia models only) This is a control expansion terminal for commercial use. VOLTAGE SELECTOR See page 22. 8 AC OUTLET(S) Use to supply power to your other A/V components (see page 22). 10 FREQUENCY STEP switch See page 21. 00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 11 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM SPEAKER SETUP SPEAKER SETUP Surround speakers (SR and SL) Speaker placement The speaker layout below shows the standard ITU-R speaker setting. You can use it to enjoy CINEMA DSP and multi-channel audio sources. The surround speakers are used for effect and surround sounds. Place these speakers behind your listening position, facing slightly inwards, about 1.8 m (6 ft) above the floor. Surround back speakers (SBR and SBL) PL PR C FR FL SL SR 60˚ SL 80˚ SBL SR SBR more than 30 cm (12 in) PREPARATION 30˚ The surround back speakers supplement the surround speakers and provide for more realistic front-to-back transitions. Place these speakers directly behind the listening position and at the same height as the surround speakers. They should be positioned at least 30 cm (12 in) apart. Ideally, they should be positioned at the same width as the front speakers. Subwoofer The use of a subwoofer, such as the YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System, is effective not only for reinforcing bass frequencies from any or all channels, but also for high fidelity reproduction of the LFE (lowfrequency effect) channel included in Dolby Digital and DTS software. The position of the subwoofer is not so critical, because low bass sounds are not highly directional. But it is better to place the subwoofer near the front speakers. Turn it slightly toward the center of the room to reduce wall reflections. Presence speakers (PR and PL) 1.8 m (6 ft) 1.8 m (6 ft) Front speakers (FR and FL) Presence speakers supplement the sound from the front speakers with extra ambient effects produced by CINEMA DSP (see page 44). These effects include sounds that filmmakers intend to locate a little farther back behind the screen in order to create more theater-like ambience. Place these speakers at the front of the room about 0.5 - 1 m (1 - 3 ft) outside the front speakers, facing slightly inwards, and about 1.8 m (6 ft) above the floor. The front speakers are used for the main source sound plus effect sounds. Place these speakers an equal distance from the ideal listening position. The distance of each speaker from each side of the video monitor should be the same. Center speaker (C) The center speaker is for the center channel sounds (dialog, vocals, etc.). If for some reason it is not practical to use a center speaker, you can do without it. Best results, however, are obtained with the full system. Align the front face of the center speaker with the front face of your video monitor. Place the speaker centrally between the front speakers and as close to the monitor as possible, such as directly over or under it. English 11 00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 12 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM SPEAKER SETUP Speaker connections 5 Tighten the knob to secure the wire. Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel (R), “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly. If the connections are faulty, no sound will be heard from the speakers, and if the polarity of the speaker connections is incorrect, the sound will be unnatural and lack bass. CAUTION • If you will use 6 ohm speakers, be sure to set this unit’s speaker impedance setting to 6 ohms before using (see page 23). • Before connecting the speakers, make sure that the power of this unit is off. • Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other or do not let them touch any metal part of this unit. This could damage this unit and/or speakers. • Use magnetically shielded speakers. If this type of speakers still creates the interference with the monitor, place the speakers away from the monitor. A speaker cord is actually a pair of insulated cables running side by side. One cable is colored or shaped differently, perhaps with a stripe, groove or ridges. Connect the striped (grooved, etc.) cable to the “+” (red) terminals on this unit and your speaker. Connect the plain cable to the “–” (black) terminals. 3 4 5 Red: positive (+) Black: negative (–) ■ Connecting to PRESENCE/ZONE 2 or PRESENCE speaker terminals 3 1 Open the tab. 2 Insert one bare wire into the hole of each terminal. 3 Return the tab to secure the wire. 10 mm (3/8") 1 2 1 Remove approximately 10 mm (3/8") of insulation from the end of each speaker cable. 2 Twist the exposed wires of the cable together to prevent short circuits. 3 Unscrew the knob. 4 Insert one bare wire into the hole in the side of each terminal. 1 2 ■ Banana plug connections (With the exception of U.K., Europe and Asia models) First, tighten the knob and then insert the banana plug connector into the end of the corresponding terminal. Banana plug (With the exception of U.K., Europe and Asia models) y You can also use banana plugs with the PRESENCE/ZONE 2 and PRESENCE speaker terminals. Open the tab, then insert one banana plug connector into the hole of each terminal. Do not attempt to close the tabs after connecting the banana plugs. 12 00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 13 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM SPEAKER SETUP Subwoofer system Presence speakers Right Left 1 2 3 Surround speakers Right Left 4 5 PREPARATION PRE OUT CENTER FRONT SURROUND SUB WOOFER PRESENCE /ZONE 2 SURROUND BACK SPEAKERS A SURROUND B FRONT CENTER SURROUND BACK (U.S.A. model) 6 7 Front speakers (B) 8 10 9 Center speaker Right Left Surround back speakers Right Left Front speakers (A) You can connect both surround back and presence speakers to this unit, but they do not output sound simultaneously. • The surround back speakers output the surround back channel included in Dolby Digital EX and DTS-ES software and only operate when the Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES decoder is turned on. • The presence speakers output ambient effects created by the DSP sound fields. They do not output sound when other sound fields are selected. English 13 00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 14 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM SPEAKER SETUP ■ FRONT terminals Connect one or two speaker systems to these terminals. If you use only one speaker system, connect it to either the FRONT A or B terminals. Note 2 The Canada model cannot output to two separate speaker systems simultaneously. ■ CENTER terminals 3 6 8 Connect a center speaker to these terminals. ■ SURROUND terminals 7 1 4 Connect surround speakers to these terminals. ■ SUB WOOFER jack Connect a subwoofer with built-in amplifier, such as the YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System, to this jack. ■ SURROUND BACK terminals Connect surround back speakers to these terminals. If you only connect one surround back speaker, connect it to the left (L) terminals. ■ PRESENCE terminals Connect presence speakers to these terminals. * If you are using either the U.S.A., Canada or Australia model, you can also use these speakers as Zone 2 speakers (see page 59). 14 5 Speaker layout 10 9 00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 15 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM CONNECTIONS CONNECTIONS Before connecting components CAUTION Do not connect this unit or other components to the mains power until all connections between components are complete. Dust protection cap Pull out the cap from the optical jack before you connect the fiber optic cable. Do not discard the cap. When you are not using the optical jack, be sure to put the cap back in place. This cap protects the jack from dust. ■ Video jacks For analog signals left analog cables L right analog cables R For digital signals optical cables O coaxial cables C This unit has three types of video jacks. Connection depends on the availability of input jacks on your monitor. The signals input through the S VIDEO jacks on this unit are automatically converted for output through the VIDEO jacks. When V CONV. is set to ON (see page 58), signals input through the VIDEO jacks can be output through the S VIDEO jacks. For video signals VIDEO video cables V S-Video cables S V V ■ Analog jacks S VIDEO PREPARATION ■ Cable indications COMPONENT VIDEO PR PB Y VIDEO jack For conventional composite video signals. V You can input analog signals from audio components by connecting audio pin cable to the analog jacks on this unit. Connect red plugs to the right jacks and white plugs to the left jacks. S VIDEO jack For S-Video signals, separated into luminance (Y) and color (C) video signals to achieve high-quality color reproduction. ■ Digital jacks COMPONENT VIDEO jacks For component signals, separated into luminance (Y) and color difference (PB, PR) to provide the best quality in picture reproduction. This unit has digital jacks for direct transmission of digital signals through either coaxial or fiber optic cables. You can use the digital jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital and DTS bitstreams. When you connect components to both the COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to the input signals from the COAXIAL jack. All digital input jacks are compatible with 96-kHz sampling digital signals. Note This unit handles digital and analog signals independently. Thus audio signals input to the analog jacks are only output to the analog OUT (REC) jacks. Likewise audio signals input to the digital (OPTICAL or COAXIAL) jacks are only output to the DIGITAL OUTPUT jack. Signal flow inside this unit Input Output (MONITOR OUT) COMPONENT VIDEO S VIDEO VIDEO Only when V CONV. is set to ON (see page 58). Note 15 English When signals are input through both the S VIDEO and VIDEO jacks, signals input through the S VIDEO jack have priority. 00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 16 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM CONNECTIONS Connecting video components ■ Connections for DVD playback Optical out Coaxial out Video out DVD player Audio out O C R L COMPONENT VIDEO PR PB Y DVD VIDEO AUDIO VIDEO DIGITAL INPUT DVD S VIDEO MONITOR OUT Video in DVD COAXIAL DVD VIDEO S VIDEO MONITOR OUT (U.S.A. model) 16 Video monitor 00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 17 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM CONNECTIONS ■ Connecting to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks This unit is equipped with 8 additional input jacks (left and right FRONT, CENTER, left and right SURROUND, left and right SURROUND BACK and SUB WOOFER) for discrete multi-channel input from a multi-format player, external decoder, sound processor or pre-amplifier. Connect the output jacks on your multi-format player or external decoder to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. Be sure to match the left and right outputs to the left and right input jacks for the front and surround channels. For 6-channel input For 8-channel input (U.S.A. model) (U.S.A. model) FRONT SURROUND SURROUND PREPARATION FRONT SURROUND BACK SUB WOOFER SUB WOOFER CENTER MULTI CH INPUT R L Subwoofer out R L R L Center out Front out Multi-format player/ External decoder CENTER MULTI CH INPUT Subwoofer out R L R L Center out Surround out Front out Multi-format player/ Surround External decoder back out Surround out Notes • When you select MULTI CH INPUT as the input source, this unit automatically turns off the digital sound field processor, and you cannot select sound field programs. • This unit does not redirect signals input to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to accommodate for missing speakers. We recommend that you connect at least a 5.1-channel speaker system before using this feature. • When headphones are used, only front left and right channels are output. English 17 00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 18 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM CONNECTIONS ■ Connections for other video components Optical out Video out Cable TV or satellite tuner Audio out O R L (U.S.A. model) COMPONENT VIDEO PR PB Y DTV /CBL VIDEO AUDIO VIDEO DIGITAL INPUT S VIDEO DVD DTV /CBL OPTICAL DTV/CBL IN VCR 1 OUT R L R L Audio in Audio out Video in DVD recorder or VCR Video out ■ VIDEO AUX jacks (on the front panel) Use these jacks to connect any video source, such as a game console or video camera, to this unit. VIDEO AUX S VIDEO VIDEO L S V L AUDIO R OPTICAL R O Optical out Audio out R Audio out L Video out S-Video out 18 Game console or video camera 00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 19 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM CONNECTIONS Connecting audio components ■ Connections for audio components CD L R Audio out COAXIAL IN CD OPTICAL C (PLAY) L MD /CD-R R OUT (REC) L Coaxial out MD recorder or tape deck R Audio in Optical out MD/CD-R O Optical in O CD player DIGITAL INPUT PREPARATION AUDIO Audio out MD/CD-R OPTICAL DIGITAL OUTPUT (U.S.A. model) English 19 00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 20 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM CONNECTIONS ■ Connecting to an external amplifier If you want to increase the power output to the speakers, or want to use another amplifier, connect an external amplifier to the PRE OUT jacks as follows. Notes • When audio pin plugs are connected to the PRE OUT jacks for output to an external amplifier, do not make connections to the corresponding SPEAKERS terminals. Set the volume of the amplifier connected to this unit to the maximum. • The signals output through the FRONT PRE OUT and CENTER PRE OUT jacks are affected by the TONE CONTROL settings. • If SPEAKERS A is turned off and SP B is set to ZONE B (see page 59), signals will only be output from the FRONT PRE OUT jacks. 1 23 4 PRE OUT CENTER L R FRONT SURROUND SUB WOOFER SURROUND BACK 5 1 FRONT PRE OUT jacks Front channel line output jacks. 2 SURROUND PRE OUT jacks Surround channel line output jacks. 3 CENTER PRE OUT jack Center channel line output jack. 4 SURROUND BACK PRE OUT jacks Surround back or presence channel line output jacks. 5 SUB WOOFER PRE OUT jack Connect a subwoofer with built-in amplifier, such as the YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System, to this jack. Notes • Each PRE OUT jack outputs the same channel signals as the corresponding speaker terminals. • Adjust the volume level of the subwoofer with the control on the subwoofer. It is also possible to adjust the volume level using the remote control (see “Manually adjusting speaker levels” on page 49). • Some signals may not be output from the SUB WOOFER PRE OUT jack depending on the SPEAKER SET (see page 53) and LFE/BASS OUT (see page 54) settings. 20 00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 21 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM CONNECTIONS Connecting the antennas Both AM and FM indoor antennas are included with this unit. In general, these antennas should provide sufficient signal strength. Connect each antenna correctly to the designated terminals. Indoor FM antenna (included) AM loop antenna (included) Notes • The AM loop antenna should be placed away from this unit. • The AM loop antenna should always be connected, even if an outdoor AM antenna is connected to this unit. • A properly installed outdoor antenna provides clearer reception than an indoor one. If you experience poor reception quality, an outdoor antenna may improve the quality. Consult the nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center about outdoor antennas. PREPARATION ■ 75-ohm/300-ohm antenna adapter (U.K. model only) TUNER 75Ω UNBAL. FM ANT GND AM ANT Ground (GND terminal) 1 Open the cover of the included 75-ohm/300-ohm antenna adapter. 2 Cut the external sleeve of the 75-ohm coaxial cable and prepare it for connection. For maximum safety and minimum interference, connect the antenna GND terminal to a good earth ground. A good earth ground is a metal stake driven into moist earth. ■ Connecting the AM loop antenna 1 3 11 (7/16) 8 (5/16) 6 (1/14) Cut the lead wire and remove it. Unit: mm (in) Lead wire Set up the AM loop antenna, then connect it to the terminals on this unit. 4 Insert the cable wire into the slot, and clamp it with pliers. Clamp Clamp Insert wire into slot. 5 2 Press and hold the tab to insert the AM loop antenna lead wires into the AM ANT and GND terminals. Snap the cover into place. ■ FREQUENCY STEP switch (Asia and General models only) Because the interstation frequency FREQUENCY STEP spacing differs in different areas, set AM FM the FREQUENCY STEP switch (locating on the rear panel) according to the frequency spacing in your area. • North, Central and South America: 100 kHz/10 kHz • Other areas: 50 kHz/9 kHz Before setting this switch, disconnect this unit’s power cord from the AC wall outlet. 10 KHZ / 100 KHZ 3 9 KHZ / 50 KHZ Orient the AM loop antenna for the best reception. English 21 00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 22 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM CONNECTIONS Connecting the power supply cord ■ Connecting the AC power cord ■ Memory back-up Plug the power cord into an AC wall outlet. The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode. However if the power cord is disconnected from the AC wall outlet, or the power supply is cut for more than one week, the stored data will be lost. ■ AC OUTLET(S) (SWITCHED) U.K. and Australia models ............................. 1 OUTLET Korea model ............................................................. None Other models ................................................ 2 OUTLETS Use these outlets to connect the power cords from your other components to this unit. Power to the AC OUTLET(S) is controlled by this unit’s STANDBY/ON (or SYSTEM POWER and STANDBY). The outlet(s) supply power to any connected component whenever this unit is turned on. The maximum power (total power consumption of components) that can be connected to the AC OUTLET(S) is: China, Asia and General models .............................. 50 W Korea model ............................................................... N/A Other models ...........................................................100 W ■ VOLTAGE SELECTOR (Asia and General models only) The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging into the AC main supply. Voltages are: Asia model ......................... 220/230-240 V AC, 50/60 Hz General model ..... 110/120/220/230-240 V AC, 50/60 Hz VOLTAGE SELECTOR VOLTAGE SELECTOR (Asia and General models) 22 00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 23 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM CONNECTIONS ■ IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch (U.S.A. model) CAUTION Do not change the setting of the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch when the unit power is switched on, as doing so may damage the unit. If this unit fails to turn on when STANDBY/ON is pressed on either the front panel or remote control, the IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch may not be fully slid to either position. If this is the case, slide the switch all the way to either position when this unit is in standby mode. PREPARATION Select the switch position (left or right) according to the impedance of the speakers in your system. SET BEFORE POWER ON IMPEDANCE SELECTOR IMPEDANCE SELECTOR switch Switch position Speaker Impedance level If you use one set (A or B), the impedance of each speaker must be 4 Ω or higher. Front If you use two sets (A and B), the impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher. Left Center, Surround, Surround back, Presence The impedance of each speaker must be 6 Ω or higher. If you use one set (A or B), the impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher. Front If you use two sets (A and B), the impedance of each speaker must be 16 Ω or higher.* Right Center, Surround, Surround back, Presence * The impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher. The Canada model cannot use two separate speaker systems (A and B) simultaneously when the switch is set to the right position. English 23 00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 24 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM CONNECTIONS Turning on the power When all connections are complete, turn on the power of this unit. VOLUME OPTIMIZER MIC PRESET/TUNING FM/AM EDIT A/B/C/D/E l PRESET/TUNING h NEXT LEVEL PROGRAM MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO INPUT PHONES SPEAKERS A B STRAIGHT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE MULTI CH INPUT PURE DIRECT STANDBY /ON VIDEO AUX EFFECT SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL (U.S.A. model) 1 CODE SET TRANSMIT SYSTEM 1 STANDBY POWER POWER POWER TV AV CD MD/CD-R TUNER SLEEP DVD DTV/CBL V-AUX MULTI CH IN VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 TV VOL TV CH TV MUTE TV INPUT 1 AMP VOLUME Press STANDBY/ON (SYSTEM POWER on the remote control) to turn on the power of this unit. SYSTEM POWER STANDBY /ON Front panel 2 24 or Remote control Turn on the video monitor connected to this unit. 00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 25 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM AUTO SETUP AUTO SETUP Introduction 1 Connect the supplied optimizer microphone to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front panel. (U.S.A. model) Notes OPTIMIZER MIC PRESET/TUNING FM/AM EDIT A/B/C/D/E l PRESET/TUNING h NEXT LEVEL PROGRAM • Please be advised that it is normal for loud test tones to be output during the auto setup procedure. • If auto setup stops and error messages appear on the screen, follow the troubleshooting on page 29. MEMORY TU MAN'L/AUTO FM A INPUT PHONES SPEAKERS A B STRAIGHT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE Y EFFECT SILENT CINEMA PREPARATION This receiver employs YAMAHA Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) technology which lets you avoid troublesome listening-based speaker setup and achieves highly accurate sound adjustments. The supplied optimizer microphone collects and analyzes the sound your speakers produce in your actual listening environment. Optimizer microphone setup YPAO performs the following checks and makes appropriate adjustments to give you the best possible sound from your system. WIRING/LEVEL: Checks which speakers are connected and the polarity of each speaker. Also checks and adjusts the sound level (volume) of each speaker so that the sound level of each speaker is the same when heard from the listening position. DISTANCE/PHASE: Checks the distance of each speaker from the listening position and adjusts the delay of each channel so that the sound from each speaker reaches the listening position at the same time. Also checks the phase of each speaker. SIZE: Checks the speakers frequency response and sets the crossover/high cut frequency for the subwoofer to improve the sound relationship between the speakers and the subwoofer. Notes • After you have completed the auto setup procedure, be sure to disconnect the optimizer microphone. • The optimizer microphone is sensitive to heat. – Keep it away from direct sunlight. – Do not place it on top of this unit. 2 Place the optimizer microphone on a flat level surface with the omni-directional microphone head upward, at your normal listening position. If possible, use a tripod (etc.) to affix the optimizer mic at the same height as your ears would be when you are seated in your listening position. Optimizer microphone position English 25 00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 26 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM AUTO SETUP Starting the setup 6 For best results, make sure the room is as quiet as possible during the auto setup procedure (YPAO). If there is too much ambient noise, the results may not be satisfactory. Press u / d to select SETUP, then press j / i to select the desired setting. 1 AUTO:MENU y p If your subwoofer has adjustable volume and crossover/high cut frequency controls, set the volume between 9 and 11 o’clock (as viewed on a conventional clockface) and set the crossover/high cut frequency to the maximum. CROSSOVER/ HIGH CUT VOLUME AUTO RELOAD MIN MAX MIN MAX Subwoofer UNDO 1 Switch on this unit and your video monitor. Make sure the OSD is displayed. 2 Press AMP. DEFAULT y 7 Press SET MENU. SET MENU MENU A/B/C/D/E 4 To perform the auto setup procedure (YPAO). To reload the last auto setup (YPAO) settings to override any manual changes. To undo the last auto setup (YPAO) and restore the previous settings. To restore the factory preset (default) setup parameters. You can choose RELOAD or UNDO only if you have already performed auto setup. AMP 3 p . SETUP;;;;;;;AUTO START Automatic processing of all items [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [<]/[>]:Select Press d to select START, then press SELECT to start the setup procedure. • If you selected AUTO in step 6, loud test tones will be output from each speaker in turn; WAIT appears during the auto setup procedure. • If you selected DEFAULT, RELOAD or UNDO in step 6, no test tones are output. Press u / d to select AUTO SETUP. 1 AUTO:MENU PRESET/CH SET MENU .;AUTOSETUP ;MANUALSETUP SELECT p p p p [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [SELECT]:Enter SETUP;;;;;;;AUTO .START Automatic processing of all items []/[]:Up/Down [SELECT]:Start The RESULT:WIRING screen appears after all items have been measured and set. 5 Press SELECT to enter AUTO SETUP. RESULT:WIRING PRESET/CH FRONTL;;;;;;;OK SELECT [<]/[>]:Select [SELECT]:Return • If an ERROR screen appears, see “If an error screen appears” on page 27. • If a WARNING screen appears, see “If a warning screen appears” on page 28. 26 00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 27 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM AUTO SETUP ■ If an error screen appears 8 Use the cursor buttons to display the results. • Press u / d to display information about individual results. • Press j / i to switch between each result list. 1 Press SELECT to display detailed information about the error. ERROR RESULT:WIRING .E-5:NOISY FRONTL;;;;;;;OK When finished, press SELECT. The RESULT:EXIT screen appears. 10 Press u / d to select SET or CANCEL. PREPARATION 2 9 p p )RETRYEXIT []/[]:Up/Down [SELECT]:Enter [<]/[>]:Select [SELECT]:Return Press j / i to switch between error messages. For details about each message, see page 29. ERROR: E-5 < NOISY > RESULT:EXIT Keep SILENT SET CANCEL 11 [SELECT]:Return p p NOWARNING RESULTLIST .)SETCANCEL []/[]:Up/Down [SELECT]:Enter To apply the auto setup (YPAO) settings. To cancel the auto setup (YPAO) without making any changes. 3 When finished, press SELECT to return to the main error screen. 4 Press u / d to select RETRY or EXIT, then press SELECT. Press SELECT to set or cancel the auto setup settings. ERROR E-5:NOISY y If you are not satisfied with the result or want to manually adjust each setup parameter, use the manual setup parameters (see page 51). p • If E-10 appears during testing, restart the procedure from step 3. • To cancel the auto setup procedure before completion, press SET MENU. RETRY EXIT p Notes .)RETRY EXIT [ ]/[ ]:Up/Down [SELECT]:Enter To retry the auto setup procedure. To exit auto setup. English 27 00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 28 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM AUTO SETUP ■ If a warning screen appears 1 Press j / i to display detailed information about each warning. For details about each message, see page 29. WARNING:W-1 <OUTOFPHASE> ReverseChannel FLFR ----------[<]/[>]:Select [SELECT]:Return y Warnings let you know about potential problems detected during auto setup. Warnings will not cancel the auto setup. 2 When you are finished, press SELECT. The RESULT:EXIT screen appears. 3 Press u / d to select RESULT LIST, then press SELECT. RESULT:EXIT WARNINGLIST .RESULTLIST p p )SETCANCEL []/[]:Up/Down [SELECT]:Enter The RESULT:WIRING screen appears. RESULT:WIRING FRONTL;;;;;;;OK [<]/[>]:Select [SELECT]:Return Continue from step 8 on page 27 to display each result. Notes • If you change speakers, speaker positions, or the layout of your listening environment, perform auto setup again to re-calibrate your system. • If SWFR PHASE:REV appears in RESULT:WIRING, the SET MENU “SUBWOOFER PHASE” parameter is automatically set to REVERSE (see page 55). • In the DISTANCE results, the distance displayed may be longer than the actual distance depending on the characteristics of your subwoofer. 28 00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 29 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM AUTO SETUP ■ Troubleshooting for auto setup procedure Before auto setup Error message Cause Remedy Connect MIC! Optimizer microphone is not connected. • Connect the supplied optimizer microphone to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front panel. Unplug HP! Headphones are connected. • Unplug the headphones. Errors during auto setup Press SELECT to display detailed information about individual errors. Press j / i to switch between error messages. Cause Remedy PREPARATION Error message E-1:NO FRONT SP Front L/R channel signal(s) is (are) not detected. • Select the front speakers with SPEAKER A or B. • Check the front left and right speaker connections. E-2:NO SURR.SP A surround channel signal is not detected. • Check the surround speaker connections. E-3:NO PRES. SP A presence channel signal is not detected. • Check the presence speaker connections. E-4:SBR->SBL Only right surround back channel signal is detected. • Connect the surround back speaker to the LEFT SURROUND BACK SPEAKERS terminal if you only have one surround back speaker. E-5:NOISY Background noise is too loud. • Try the auto setup procedure in a quiet environment. • Turn off noisy electric equipment like air conditioners (etc.) or move them away from the optimizer microphone. E-6:CHECK SURR. Surround back speaker(s) is (are) connected, though surround L/R speakers are not. • Connect surround speakers when you use (a) surround back speaker(s). E-7:NO MIC The optimizer microphone was unplugged during the auto setup procedure. • Do not touch the optimizer microphone during the auto setup procedure. E-8:NO SIGNAL The optimizer microphone does not detect test tones. • Check the microphone setting. • Check the speaker connections and placement. E-9:USER CANCEL The auto setup procedure was cancelled due to user activity. • Perform the auto setup procedure again. Do not adjust VOLUME (etc.) during the auto setup procedure. E-10:OTHER ERROR A DSP communication error or hangup occurred. • Perform the auto setup procedure again. Warnings after auto setup Press j / i to display detailed information about individual warnings. Warning message Remedy W-1:OUT OF PHASE Speaker polarity is not correct. This message may appear depending on the speakers even when the speakers are connected correctly. • Check the speaker connections for proper polarity (+ or –). W-2:OVER 24m (80ft) The distance between the speaker and the listening position is over 24 m (80 ft). • Bring the speaker closer to the listening position. W-3:LEVEL ERROR The difference of volume level among speakers is excessive. (No level correction is made.) • Readjust the speaker installation so that all speakers are set in locations with similar conditions. • Check the speaker connections. • Use speakers of similar quality and efficiency. • Adjust the output volume of the subwoofer. If the ERROR or WARNING screens appears, check the cause of the problem, then perform the auto setup procedure again. If warning W-1 appears, corrections are made, but they may not be optimal. If warning W-2 or W-3 appears, no corrections are made. If error E-10 occurs repeatedly, please contact a qualified YAMAHA service center. English • • • • Cause 29 00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 30 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM PLAYBACK PLAYBACK Basic operations 4 (U.S.A. model) Select the input source. Use INPUT (or press one of the input selector buttons on the remote control) to select the input you desire. INPUT CD MD/CD-R TUNER SLEEP DVD DTV/CBL V-AUX MULTI CH IN VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 VOLUME OPTIMIZER MIC PRESET/TUNING FM/AM A/B/C/D/E l PRESET/TUNING h NEXT LEVEL EDIT PROGRAM MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO or INPUT PHONES STRAIGHT SPEAKERS A B TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE PURE DIRECT MULTI CH INPUT STANDBY /ON AMP VIDEO AUX EFFECT SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL Front panel 1 3 1 4 7 7 CODE SET 4 The current input source name and input mode appear in the front panel display and video monitor for a few seconds. 6 TRANSMIT SYSTEM POWER POWER TV AV CD MD/CD-R DVD DTV/CBL VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 TV VOL Remote control STANDBY POWER TUNER SLEEP TV VOL V-AUX TV CH TV CH VOLUME TV MUTE TV INPUT STEREO HALL MULTI CH IN 6 t q EX q PL q PL q PL x PCM MUTE AMP VOLUME JAZZ ROCK 1 2 3 4 MUSIC ENTERTAIN TV THTR MOVIE 5 6 7 8 q/DTS NIGHT EX/ES STRAIGHT 9 0 10 96 24 DVR/VCR2 VCR-1 SILENT CINEMA MATRIX DISCRETE VIRTUAL SP AB q DIGITAL 7 V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD NIGHT ZONE2 SLEEP MD/CD-R PTY HOLD AUTO HiFi DSP PS TUNER EON 10 D VD D AUTOO00 Selected input source CD TUNED STEREO MEMORY MUTE VOLUME PTY RT CT dB ft mS dB 96/24 L C R LFE SL SB SR Input mode ENTER EFFECT PRESET/CH 1 5 Start playback or select a broadcast station on the source component. Refer to the operating instructions for the component. 6 Adjust the volume to the desired output level. Press STANDBY/ON (SYSTEM POWER on the remote control) to turn on the power. SYSTEM POWER STANDBY /ON or VOLUME Front panel Remote control or 2 Turn on the video monitor connected to this unit. 3 Press SPEAKERS A or B on the front panel. Each press turns the respective speakers on or off. Front panel SPEAKERS B A 30 VOLUME Remote control 00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 31 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM PLAYBACK 7 Select a sound field program if desired. Use PROGRAM (or press AMP to select the AMP mode, then press one of the sound field program buttons repeatedly) to select a sound field program. See page 44 for details about sound field programs. PROGRAM AMP or Front panel STEREO HALL JAZZ 1 2 3 ROCK 4 MUSIC ENTERTAIN TV THTR MOVIE 5 6 7 8 q/DTS NIGHT EX/ES STRAIGHT 9 0 10 ENTER To adjust the tone You can adjust the tonal quality TONE CONTROL of your front left and right, center, presence and subwoofer speakers or headphones (when connected). Press TONE CONTROL on the PROGRAM front panel repeatedly to select TREBLE or BASS, then rotate PROGRAM to the right or left to increase or decrease. • Select TREBLE to adjust the high frequency response. • Select BASS to adjust the low frequency response. To cancel the tone control, press TONE CONTROL repeatedly to select BYPASS. y Speaker and headphone adjustments are stored independently. EFFECT Remote control Notes • This unit will not be set to “SILENT CINEMA” when MULTI CH INPUT is selected as the input source. • “SILENT CINEMA” is not effective when PURE DIRECT or 2ch Stereo is selected, or in STRAIGHT mode. TONE CONTROL is not effective during playback in the PURE DIRECT mode, or when MULTI CH INPUT is selected (page 35). To mute the sound Press MUTE on the remote control. The MUTE indicator blinks in the front panel display. To resume the audio output, press MUTE again (or press VOLUME –/+). The MUTE indicator disappears from the display. BASIC OPERATION To listen with headphones (SILENT CINEMA) “SILENT CINEMA” allows you to enjoy multi-channel music or movie sound, including Dolby Digital and DTS surround, through ordinary headphones. “SILENT CINEMA” activates automatically whenever you connect headphones to the PHONES jack while listening to CINEMA DSP or HiFi DSP sound field programs. When activated, the “SILENT CINEMA” indicator lights up in the front panel display. Note MUTE y You can adjust the muting level (see page 56). English 31 00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 32 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM PLAYBACK ■ Selecting MULTI CH INPUT Press MULTI CH INPUT so that “MULTI CH INPUT” appears in the front panel display and video monitor. MULTI CH INPUT Selecting sound field programs ■ Front panel operation MULTI CH IN or VOLUME Front panel Remote control OPTIMIZER MIC PRESET/TUNING FM/AM A/B/C/D/E l PRESET/TUNING h NEXT LEVEL EDIT PROGRAM MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO INPUT PHONES STRAIGHT SPEAKERS A B TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE MULTI CH INPUT PURE DIRECT STANDBY /ON VIDEO AUX EFFECT SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO MULTI CH INPUT VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL (U.S.A. model) PROGRAM Note When “MULTI CH INPUT” is shown in the front panel display, no other source can be played. To select another input source with INPUT (or one of the input selector buttons), press MULTI CH INPUT to turn off “MULTI CH INPUT” in the front panel display. Rotate PROGRAM to select the desired program. The name of the selected program appears in the front panel display and video monitor. PROGRAM ■ Playing video sources in the background You can combine a video image from a video source with sound from an audio source. For example, you can enjoy listening to classical music while viewing beautiful scenery from the video source on the video monitor. Use the input selector buttons on the remote control to select a video source, then select an audio source. CD MD/CD-R TUNER SLEEP DVD DTV/CBL V-AUX MULTI CH IN VCR 1 DVR/VCR1 Audio sources AMP Video sources Note If you want to enjoy audio from the MULTI CH INPUT jacks together with a video source, first select the video source, then press MULTI CH INPUT. 32 t 96 24 DVR/VCR2 VCR-1 SILENT CINEMA MATRIX DISCRETE VIRTUAL SP AB q DIGITAL q EX q PL q PL q PL x PCM V-AUX DTV/CBL SLEEP MD/CD-R DVD NIGHT ZONE2 PTY HOLD AUTO HiFi DSP PS TUNER EON 10 DJAZZACLUBO00 Program name CD TUNED STEREO MEMORY MUTE VOLUME PTY RT CT dB ft mS dB 96/24 L C R LFE SL SB SR 00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 33 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM PLAYBACK ■ Remote control operation CODE SET TRANSMIT ■ Enjoying multi-channel software TV VOL TV CH TV MUTE TV INPUT STEREO HALL JAZZ 1 2 3 4 MUSIC ENTERTAIN TV THTR MOVIE 5 6 7 8 q/DTS NIGHT EX/ES STRAIGHT 9 0 If you connected a surround back speaker, use this feature to enjoy 6.1/7.1-channel playback for multi-channel sources using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx, Dolby Digital Surround EX or DTS-ES decoders. VOLUME SYSTEM AMP POWER POWER TV AV STANDBY POWER CD MD/CD-R TUNER SLEEP DVD DTV/CBL V-AUX MULTI CH IN VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 MUTE AMP ROCK 10 ENTER EFFECT TV VOL TV CH VOLUME PRESET/CH LEVEL SET MENU TITLE MENU Sound field program buttons Press AMP to select the AMP mode, then press EX/ES on the remote control to switch between 5.1 and 6.1/7.1-channel playback. A/B/C/D/E TV MUTE TV INPUT SELECT EX/ES 10 Press AMP to select the AMP mode, then press one of the sound field program buttons repeatedly to select the desired program. The name of the selected program appears in the front panel display. To select a decoder, press j / i repeatedly when PLIIxMusic (etc.) is displayed. PRESET/CH AMP HALL JAZZ ROCK 1 2 3 4 MUSIC ENTERTAIN TV THTR MOVIE 5 6 7 8 q/DTS NIGHT EX/ES STRAIGHT 9 0 10 SELECT ENTER EFFECT t 96 24 q EX q PL DVR/VCR2 VCR-1 SILENT CINEMA MATRIX DISCRETE VIRTUAL SP AB q DIGITAL q PL q PL x PCM V-AUX DTV/CBL SLEEP MD/CD-R DVD NIGHT ZONE2 PTY HOLD AUTO HiFi DSP PS TUNER CD TUNED STEREO MEMORY MUTE VOLUME PTY RT CT EON 10 DJAZZACLUBO00 dB ft mS dB 96/24 L C R LFE SL SB SR Program name y Choose a sound field program based on your listening preference, and not on the name of the program. Notes • When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects the last sound field program used with that source. • Sound field programs cannot be selected when MULTI CH INPUT is selected. • Sampling frequencies higher than 48 kHz (except for DTS 96/ 24 signals) will be sampled down to 48 kHz, then sound field programs will be applied. AUTO (AUTO) When a signal (flag) that can be recognized by the unit is input, the unit selects the optimum decoder for playing back the signal in 6.1/7.1 channels. If the unit cannot recognize the flag or no flag is present in the input signal, it cannot automatically be played in 6.1/ 7.1 channels. BASIC OPERATION STEREO Decoders (select with j / i) You can select from the following decoders depending on the format of the software you are playing. PLIIxMovie For playing back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 6.1/7.1 channels using the Pro Logic IIx movie decoder. PLIIxMusic For playing back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 6.1/7.1 channels using the Pro Logic IIx music decoder. EX/ES For playing back Dolby Digital signals in 6.1/7.1 channels using the Dolby Digital Surround EX decoder. DTS signals are played back in 6.1/7.1 channels using the DTS-ES decoder. EX For playing back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 6.1/7.1 channels using the Dolby Digital Surround EX decoder. OFF (OFF) Decoders are not used to create 6.1/7.1 channels. y 33 English When “SURR B L/R SP” is set to SMLx1 or LRGx1 (see page 54), the surround back channel will be output from the left SURROUND BACK speaker terminals. 00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 34 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM PLAYBACK Notes • Some 6.1-channel compatible discs do not have a signal (flag) which this unit can automatically detect. When playing these kinds of discs with 6.1-channel, select a decoder (PLIIx Movie, PLIIx Music, EX/ES or EX) manually. • 6.1-channel playback is not possible even if EX/ES is pressed in the following cases: – When “SURR L/R SP” (see page 53) or “SURR B L/R SP” (see page 54) is set to NONE. – When the source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jack is being played. – When the source being played does not contain surround left and right channel signals. – When a Dolby Digital KARAOKE source is being played. – When “2ch Stereo” or PURE DIRECT is selected. • When the power of this unit is turned off, the input mode will be reset to AUTO. • When the DTS-ES decoder is applied to DTS 96/24 signals, you cannot use the DTS 96/24 decoding feature. • The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “SURR B L/R SP” is set to NONE (see page 54). • PLIIxMovie cannot be selected when “SURR B L/R SP” is set to SMLx1 or LRGx1 (see page 54). ■ Enjoying 2-channel software Signals input from 2-channel sources can also be played back on multiple channels. Press q/DTS on the remote control to select the decoder. q/DTS 9 You can select from the following decoders depending on the type of software you are playing and your personal preference. PRO LOGIC SUR. STANDARD Standard processing for Dolby Surround sources. PRO LOGIC SUR. ENHANCED CINEMA DSP enhanced processing for Dolby Surround sources. PRO LOGIC IIx Movie* Dolby Pro Logic II/IIx processing for movie software. PRO LOGIC IIx Music* Dolby Pro Logic II/IIx processing for music software. PRO LOGIC IIx Game* Dolby Pro Logic II/IIx processing for game software. DTS Neo:6 Cinema DTS processing for movie software. DTS Neo:6 Music DTS processing for music software. * Use the PLII/PLIIx parameter to select the Pro Logic II or Pro Logic IIx decoders (see page 72). Note The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “SURR B L/R SP” is set to NONE (see page 54). 34 00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 35 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM PLAYBACK ■ Listening to high fidelity stereo sound (PURE DIRECT) PURE DIRECT allows you to bypass this unit’s decoders and DSP processors, and turn off the video circuitry and front panel display to enjoy pure high fidelity sound from analog and PCM sources. Press PURE DIRECT to activate pure direct. The indicator around the front panel button lights up. ■ Night listening modes The night listening modes are designed to improve listenability at lower volumes or at night. Choose either NIGHT:CINEMA or NIGHT:MUSIC depending on the type of material you are playing. Press NIGHT on the remote control repeatedly to select cinema or music. When night listening is selected, the NIGHT indicator in the front panel display lights up. PURE DIRECT NIGHT 0 Remote control Front panel y The front panel display switches on momentarily when an operation is performed. Notes • To avoid unexpected noise, do not play DTS-encoded CDs in this mode. • When a multi-channel signal (Dolby Digital or DTS) is input, this unit automatically switches to the corresponding analog input. • No sound will be output from the subwoofer. • The following operations are not possible during PURE DIRECT operation: – switching the sound field program – displaying the OSD – adjusting SET MENU parameters – all video functions (video conversion etc.) • PURE DIRECT is automatically cancelled whenever this unit is set to the standby mode. Press j / i to adjust the effect level while NIGHT:CINEMA or NIGHT:MUSIC is displayed. This adjusts the level of compression. BASIC OPERATION To cancel, press PURE DIRECT again. The indicator around the front panel button goes out and the previous settings are restored. • Select NIGHT:CINEMA when watching films to reduce the dynamic range of film soundtracks and make dialog easier to hear at lower volumes. • Select NIGHT:MUSIC when listening to music sources to preserve ease-of-listening for all sounds. • Select OFF if you do not want to use this function. PRESET/CH SELECT Remote control Effect.Lvl:MID • Select MIN for minimum compression. • Select MID for standard compression. • Select MAX for maximum compression. y NIGHT:CINEMA and NIGHT:MUSIC adjustments are stored independently. Notes • You cannot use the night listening modes with PURE DIRECT or MULTI CH INPUT (even though the NIGHT indicator lights up when PURE DIRECT is selected). • The night listening modes may vary in effectiveness depending on the input source and surround sound settings you use. English 35 00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 36 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM PLAYBACK ■ Downmixing to 2 channels You can enjoy 2-channel stereo playback even from multichannel sources. Rotate PROGRAM (or press STEREO on the remote control) to select 2ch Stereo. PROGRAM STEREO HALL JAZZ ROCK 1 2 3 4 MUSIC ENTERTAIN TV THTR MOVIE or 5 6 7 8 q/DTS NIGHT EX/ES STRAIGHT 9 0 10 Selecting input modes This unit comes with a variety of input jacks. Do the following to select the type of input signals you want to use. 1 Rotate INPUT to select the input source. INPUT ENTER EFFECT Remote control Front panel 2 2ch Stereo Press INPUT MODE to select an input mode. In most cases, use AUTO. y INPUT MODE You can use a subwoofer with this program when SWFR or BOTH is selected in “BASS OUT”. ■ Listening to unprocessed input signals In STRAIGHT mode, two channel stereo sources are output from only the front left and right speakers. Multichannel sources are decoded straight into the appropriate channels without any additional effect processing. t 96 24 q EX q PL DVR/VCR2 VCR-1 SILENT CINEMA MATRIX DISCRETE VIRTUAL SP AB q DIGITAL q PL q PL x PCM V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD NIGHT ZONE2 SLEEP MD/CD-R PTY HOLD AUTO HiFi DSP PS TUNER CD TUNED STEREO MEMORY MUTE VOLUME PTY RT CT EON 10 D VD D AUTOO00 dB ft mS dB 96/24 L C R LFE SL SB SR Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) to select STRAIGHT. Input source Input mode STRAIGHT STRAIGHT AUTO ENTER or EFFECT EFFECT Front panel Remote control DTS STRAIGHT ANALOG Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) again so that “STRAIGHT” disappears from the display when you want to turn the sound effect back on. Automatically selects input signals in the following order: 1) Digital signals* 2) Analog signals Selects only digital signals encoded in DTS. If no DTS signals are input, no sound is output. Selects only analog signals. If no analog signals are input, no sound is output. * If this unit detects a Dolby Digital or DTS signal, the decoder automatically switches to the appropriate sound field program. ■ Virtual CINEMA DSP y Virtual CINEMA DSP allows you to enjoy the CINEMA DSP programs without surround speakers. It creates virtual speakers to reproduce the natural sound field. If you do not connect surround speakers, Virtual CINEMA DSP activates automatically whenever you select a CINEMA DSP sound field program. You can adjust the default input mode this unit selects when the power is turned on (see page 58). Note Virtual CINEMA DSP will not activate, even when “SURR L/R SP” is set to NONE (see page 53) in the following cases: – When MULTI CH INPUT is selected as the input source. – When headphones are connected to the PHONES jack. 36 00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 37 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM PLAYBACK Notes 3 • When you play DTS-encoded CD/LDs with the input mode set to AUTO: – This unit automatically switches to the DTS decoding mode. The unit remains in DTS mode (and the t indicator may flash) for up to 30 seconds after playback of the DTS source is complete. To manually release the DTS mode, press INPUT MODE to reselect AUTO. – The DTS decoding mode may be released if search or skip operations are performed for more than 30 seconds. To prevent this, press INPUT MODE to select DTS. • If the digital output data of the player has been processed in any way, you may not be able to perform DTS decoding even if you make a digital connection between this unit and the player. Displaying information about the input source Press u / d to display the following information about the input signal. PRESET/CH SELECT (Format) in You can display the type, format and sampling frequency of the current input signal. 1 CD MD/CD-R TUNER SLEEP DVD DTV/CBL V-AUX MULTI CH IN VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 AMP rate flg BASIC OPERATION 2 fs Select the input source. Signal format display. When the unit cannot detect a digital signal it automatically switches to analog input. Number of source channels in the input signal. For example, a multi-channel soundtrack with 3 front channels, 2 surround channels and LFE, is displayed as “3/2/LFE”. Sampling frequency. When the unit is unable to detect the sampling frequency “Unknown” appears. Bit rate. When the unit is unable to detect the bit rate “Unknown” appears. Flag data encoded with DTS or Dolby Digital signals that cue this unit to automatically switch decoders. Press AMP to select the AMP mode, then press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) so that “STRAIGHT” appears in the display. STRAIGHT AMP then ENTER EFFECT STRAIGHT English 37 00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 38 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM TUNING TUNING Automatic and manual tuning 3 There are 2 tuning methods; automatic and manual. Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are strong and there is no interference. TUNING MODE ■ Automatic tuning If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, tuning is not possible. Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn the colon (:) off. VOLUME PRESET/TUNING FM/AM l PRESET/TUNING h A/B/C/D/E NEXT EDIT AUTO Lights up AUTO/MAN'L MONO (U.S.A. model) OPTIMIZER MIC Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO) so that the AUTO indicator lights up in the front panel display. LEVEL PROGRAM MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO PRESET/TUNING INPUT PHONES SPEAKERS A B STRAIGHT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE MULTI CH INPUT PURE DIRECT STANDBY /ON VIDEO AUX EDIT EFFECT SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO 3 2 4 1 VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL 3 R/VCR2 VCR-1 T CINEMA SP TUAL V-AUX DTV/CBL MD/CD-R DVD NIGHT ZONE2 AB PTY HOLD AUTO HiFi DSP SLEEP PS TUNER TUNED STEREO MEM PTY RT CT EON 1A -AAM11440kkHz 1 Rotate INPUT to select TUNER as the input source. INPUT 4 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h once to begin automatic tuning. Press h to tune into a higher frequency, or press l to tune into a lower frequency. l PRESET/TUNING h LEVEL 2 Press FM/AM to select the reception band. “FM” or “AM” appears in the front panel display. R/VCR2 FM/AM FM or AM VCR-1 T CINEMA SP TUAL AB V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD NIGHT ZONE2 SLEEP MD/CD-R PTY HOLD AUTO HiFi DSP PS TUNER TUNED STEREO MEM PTY RT CT EON 1A -AAM11530kkHz When tuned into a station, the TUNED indicator lights up and the frequency of the received station is shown in the front panel display. 38 00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 39 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM TUNING ■ Manual tuning If the signal from the station you want to select is weak, tune into it manually. Manually tuning into an FM station will automatically switch the tuner to monaural reception to increase the signal quality. 1 Select TUNER and the reception band following steps 1 and 2 as described in “Automatic tuning”. 2 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO) so that the AUTO indicator disappears from the front panel display. Presetting stations ■ Automatically presetting FM stations You can use the automatic preset tuning feature to store FM stations. This function enables this unit to automatically tune into FM stations with strong signals, and to store up to 40 (8 stations in 5 groups, A1 through E8) of those stations in order. You can then recall any preset station easily by selecting the preset station number. (U.S.A. model) VOLUME OPTIMIZER MIC PRESET/TUNING FM/AM EDIT TUNING MODE AUTO l PRESET/TUNING h NEXT LEVEL MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO INPUT PHONES STRAIGHT SPEAKERS A B TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE PURE DIRECT MULTI CH INPUT STANDBY /ON Disappears AUTO/MAN'L MONO A/B/C/D/E PROGRAM VIDEO AUX EFFECT SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO 1 1 PRESET/TUNING VCR-1 T CINEMA SP TUAL AB V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD NIGHT ZONE2 SLEEP MD/CD-R PTY HOLD AUTO HiFi DSP PS TUNER TUNED STEREO MEM PTY RT CT EON 1A -AAM11440kkHz 3 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h to tune into the desired station manually. Hold down the button to l PRESET/TUNING h continue searching. LEVEL 2 AUDIO R OPTICAL 2 Press FM/AM to select the FM band. FM/AM EDIT R/VCR2 3 L BASIC OPERATION If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, tuning is not possible. Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn the colon (:) off. VIDEO FM Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO) so that the AUTO indicator lights up in the front panel display. TUNING MODE AUTO Lights up AUTO/MAN'L MONO If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, tuning is not possible. Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn the colon (:) off. PRESET/TUNING EDIT R/VCR2 VCR-1 T CINEMA SP TUAL AB V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD NIGHT ZONE2 SLEEP MD/CD-R PTY HOLD AUTO HiFi DSP PS TUNER TUNED STEREO MEM PTY RT CT EON 1A -AAM11440kkHz English 39 00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 40 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM TUNING ■ Manually presetting stations 3 Press and hold MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) for more than 3 seconds. The preset number, the MEMORY and AUTO indicators flash. After about 5 seconds, automatic presetting starts from the frequency currently displayed and proceeds toward the higher frequencies. You can also store up to 40 stations (8 stations in 5 groups, A1 through E8) manually. VOLUME OPTIMIZER MIC PRESET/TUNING FM/AM A/B/C/D/E l PRESET/TUNING h NEXT LEVEL EDIT PROGRAM MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO INPUT PHONES STRAIGHT SPEAKERS A B MEMORY TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE MULTI CH INPUT PURE DIRECT STANDBY /ON VIDEO AUX EFFECT SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL MAN'L/AUTO FM (U.S.A. model) 3 t 96 24 q EX q PL DVR/VCR2 VCR-1 SILENT CINEMA MATRIX DISCRETE VIRTUAL SP AB q DIGITAL q PL q PL x PCM V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD NIGHT ZONE2 SLEEP MD/CD-R PTY HOLD AUTO HiFi DSP PS TUNER 4 2,5 CD TUNED STEREO MEMORY MUTE VOLUME PTY RT CT EON 1A 1:FM187.5kMHz dB ft mS dB 96/24 L C R 1 LFE SL SB SR When automatic preset tuning is completed, the front panel display shows the frequency of the last preset station. t 96 24 DVR/VCR2 VCR-1 SILENT CINEMA MATRIX DISCRETE VIRTUAL SP AB q DIGITAL q EX q PL q PL q PL x PCM Notes • Any stored station data existing under a preset number is cleared when you store a new station under that preset number. • If the number of the received stations does not reach 40 (E8), automatic preset tuning has automatically stopped after searching all stations. • Only FM stations with sufficient signal strength are stored automatically by automatic preset tuning. If the station you want to store is weak in signal strength, tune into it manually, and store it by following the procedure in “Manually presetting stations”. Tune into a station. See page 38 for tuning instructions. V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD NIGHT ZONE2 SLEEP MD/CD-R PTY HOLD AUTO HiFi DSP PS TUNER CD TUNED STEREO MEMORY MUTE VOLUME PTY RT CT EON 1A 1:AM18630kkHz dB ft mS dB 96/24 L C R LFE SL SB SR When tuned into a station, the front panel display shows the frequency of the station received. 2 Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM). The MEMORY indicator flashes for about 5 seconds. MEMORY MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM Flashes Automatic preset tuning options You can select the preset number from which this unit will store FM stations and/or begin tuning toward lower frequencies. After pressing MEMORY in step 3: 1 Press A/B/C/D/E, then PRESET/TUNING l / h to select the preset number under which the first station will be stored. Automatic preset tuning will stop when stations have all been stored up to E8. 2 Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn off the colon (:) and then press PRESET/TUNING l to begin tuning toward the lower frequencies. Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is set in the standby mode, the power cord is disconnected from the AC outlet, or the power supply is temporarily cut due to power failure. However, if the power is cut for more than one week, the preset stations may be cleared. If so, store the stations again by using the presetting station methods. 40 3 Press A/B/C/D/E repeatedly to select a preset station group (A to E) while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. The group letter appears. Check that the colon (:) appears in the front panel display. A/B/C/D/E NEXT t 96 24 DVR/VCR2 VCR-1 SILENT CINEMA MATRIX DISCRETE VIRTUAL SP AB q DIGITAL q EX q PL q PL q PL x PCM V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD NIGHT ZONE2 SLEEP MD/CD-R PTY HOLD AUTO HiFi DSP PS TUNER EON 1C 1:AM18630kkHz Preset group CD TUNED STEREO MEMORY MUTE VOLUME PTY RT CT dB ft mS dB 96/24 L C R LFE SL SB SR 00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 41 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM TUNING 4 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h to select a preset station number (1 through 8) while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. Press h to select a higher preset station number. Press l to select a lower preset station number. Selecting preset stations You can tune any desired station simply by selecting the preset station number under which it was stored. l PRESET/TUNING h VOLUME LEVEL OPTIMIZER MIC PRESET/TUNING FM/AM A/B/C/D/E l PRESET/TUNING h NEXT LEVEL EDIT PROGRAM MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO INPUT PHONES STRAIGHT SPEAKERS A B TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE MULTI CH INPUT PURE DIRECT STANDBY /ON VIDEO AUX EFFECT SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO t 96 24 q EX q PL DVR/VCR2 VCR-1 SILENT CINEMA MATRIX DISCRETE VIRTUAL SP AB q DIGITAL q PL q PL x PCM V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD NIGHT ZONE2 SLEEP MD/CD-R PTY HOLD AUTO HiFi DSP PS TUNER VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL CD TUNED STEREO MEMORY MUTE VOLUME PTY RT CT EON (U.S.A. model) dB 1C 3:AM18630kkHz ft mS dB 96/24 L C R 1 2 LFE SL SB SR Preset number q/DTS NIGHT 9 0 EX/ES 10 STRAIGHT ENTER EFFECT LEVEL PRESET/CH 1 2 SET MENU TITLE MENU A/B/C/D/E 5 MAN'L/AUTO FM t 96 24 DVR/VCR2 VCR-1 SILENT CINEMA MATRIX DISCRETE VIRTUAL SP AB q DIGITAL q EX q PL q PL q PL x PCM V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD NIGHT ZONE2 SLEEP MD/CD-R PTY HOLD AUTO HiFi DSP PS TUNER SELECT RETURN AUDIO When performing this operation with the remote control, first press TUNER to set the remote to tuner mode. 1 CD EON 1C 3:AM18630kkHz dB ft mS dB 96/24 DISPLAY REC TUNED STEREO MEMORY MUTE VOLUME PTY RT CT ON SCREEN TEST L C R LFE SL SB SR Press A/B/C/D/E to select the preset station group. The preset group letter appears in the front panel display and changes each time you press the button. A/B/C/D/E SET MENU Shows the displayed station has been stored as C3. or MENU NEXT 6 A/B/C/D/E Front panel Repeat steps 1 to 5 to store other stations. BASIC OPERATION Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) on the front panel while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. The station band and MEMORY frequency appear in the front panel display with the preset group and number you have selected. Remote control Notes • Any stored station data existing under a preset number is cleared when you store a new station under that preset number. • The reception mode (stereo or monaural) is stored along with the station frequency. 2 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h (PRESET CH u / d on the remote control) to select a preset station number (1 through 8). The preset group and number appear on the front panel display along with the station band, frequency and the TUNED indicator lights up. PRESET/CH l PRESET/TUNING h or SELECT LEVEL Front panel Remote control VCR-1 AB x V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD NIGHT ZONE2 SLEEP MD/CD-R PTY HOLD AUTO HiFi DSP PS TUNER CD English DVR/VCR2 SILENT CINEMA SP VIRTUAL TUNED STEREO MEMORY M PTY RT CT EON 1E 1:FM187.5kMHz ft mS dB 9 41 00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 42 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM TUNING Exchanging preset stations 4 You can exchange the assignment of two preset stations with each other. The example below describes the procedure for exchanging preset station “E1” with “A5”. Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) again. The stations stored at the two preset assignments are exchanged. PRESET/TUNING EDIT VOLUME OPTIMIZER MIC PRESET/TUNING FM/AM A/B/C/D/E l PRESET/TUNING h NEXT EDIT LEVEL PROGRAM MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO DVR/VCR2 STRAIGHT SPEAKERS A B TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE AB MULTI CH INPUT PURE DIRECT STANDBY /ON x VIDEO AUX EFFECT SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL (U.S.A. model) 2,4 1,3 1,3 1 Select preset station “E1” using A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING l / h. See “Selecting preset stations”. 2 Press and hold PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) for more than 3 seconds. “E1” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front panel display. PRESET/TUNING EDIT DVR/VCR2 VCR-1 SILENT CINEMA SP VIRTUAL x 3 SLEEP DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER PTY HOLD AUTO HiFi DSP PS CD TUNED STEREO MEMORY M PTY RT CT EON 1E 1:FM187.5kMHz ft mS dB 9 Select preset station “A5” using A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING l / h. “A5” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front panel display. A/B/C/D/E l PRESET/TUNING h NEXT LEVEL DVR/VCR2 VCR-1 SILENT CINEMA SP VIRTUAL AB x 42 V-AUX NIGHT ZONE2 AB V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD NIGHT ZONE2 SLEEP MD/CD-R PTY HOLD AUTO HiFi DSP PS VCR-1 SILENT CINEMA SP VIRTUAL INPUT PHONES TUNER CD TUNED STEREO MEMORY M PTY RT CT EON 1A 5:FM190.6kMHz ft mS dB 9 V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD NIGHT ZONE2 SLEEP MD/CD-R PTY HOLD AUTO HiFi DSP PS TUNER CD TUNED STEREO MEMORY M PTY RT CT EON 1E EDIT18E1-A5Hz ft mS dB 9 00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 43 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM RECORDING RECORDING Recording adjustments and other operations are performed from the recording components. Refer to the operating instructions for those components. VOLUME OPTIMIZER MIC PRESET/TUNING FM/AM l PRESET/TUNING h A/B/C/D/E NEXT EDIT LEVEL PROGRAM MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO INPUT PHONES SPEAKERS A B STRAIGHT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE MULTI CH INPUT PURE DIRECT STANDBY /ON VIDEO AUX EFFECT SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL (U.S.A. model) 1 2 CODE SET TRANSMIT SYSTEM 1 2 POWER TV AV STANDBY POWER CD MD/CD-R TUNER SLEEP DVD DTV/CBL V-AUX MULTI CH IN VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 TV VOL TV CH TV MUTE TV INPUT 1 AMP VOLUME Turn on the power of this unit and all connected components. Select the source component you want to record from. INPUT or Front panel CD MD/CD-R TUNER SLEEP DVD DTV/CBL V-AUX MULTI CH IN VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 AMP Remote control 3 Start playback (or select a broadcast station) on the source component. 4 Start recording on the recording component. BASIC OPERATION 2 POWER Notes • When this unit is set in the standby mode, you cannot record between other components connected to this unit. • The setting of TONE CONTROL, VOLUME, “SPEAKER LEVEL” (page 55) and programs does not affect recorded material. • A source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks of this unit cannot be recorded. • S-Video and composite video signals pass independently through this unit’s video circuits. Therefore, when recording or dubbing video signals, if your video source component is connected to provide only an S-Video (or only a composite video) signal, you can record only an S-Video (or only a composite video) signal to your VCR. • Digital signals input to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks are not output to the analog AUDIO OUT (L/R) jacks for recording. Likewise, analog signals input to the AUDIO IN (L/R) jacks are not output to the DIGITAL OUTPUT jack. Therefore, if your source component is connected to provide only digital (or analog) signals, you can only record digital (or analog) signals. • A given input source is not output on the same REC OUT channel. (For example, the signal input from VCR 1 IN is not output on VCR 1 OUT.) • Check the copyright laws in your country to record from records, CDs, radio, etc. Recording of copyrighted material may infringe copyright laws. If you playback a video source that uses scrambled or encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, the picture itself may be disturbed due to those signals. ■ Special considerations when recording DTS software The DTS signal is a digital bitstream. Attempting to digitally record the DTS bitstream will result in noise being recorded. Therefore, if you want to use this unit to record sources that have DTS signals recorded on them, the following considerations and adjustments need to be made. For DVDs and CDs encoded with DTS, when your player is compatible with the DTS format, follow its operating instructions to make a setting so that the analog signal will be output from the player. y Do a test recording before you start an actual recording. English 43 00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 44 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS This unit is equipped with a variety of precise digital decoders that allow you to enjoy multichannel playback from almost any sound source (stereo or multichannel). This unit is also equipped with a YAMAHA digital sound field processing (DSP) chip containing several sound field programs which you can use to enhance your playback experience. Most of these sound field programs are precise digital recreations of actual acoustic environments found in famous concert halls, music venues, and movie theaters. y The YAMAHA CINEMA DSP modes are compatible with all Dolby Digital, DTS, and Dolby Surround sources. Set the input mode to AUTO (see page 36) to enable this unit to automatically switch to the appropriate digital decoder according to the input signal. Notes • This unit’s DSP sound field programs are recreations of real-world acoustic environments made from precise measurements taken in the actual hall, etc. Thus you may notice variations in the strength of the reflections coming from the front, back, left and right. • Feel free to choose a sound field program based on your listening preference, and not purely on the name of the program itself. For movie/video sources You can select from the following sound fields when playing movie or video sources. The sound fields marked “MULTI” can be used with multi-channel sources, like DVD, digital TV, etc. Those marked “2-CH” can be used with 2-channel (stereo) sources like TV programs, video tapes, etc. Program Features STEREO: 2ch Stereo Downmixes multi-channel sources to 2 channel (left and right) or plays back 2-channel sources as is. MUSIC VIDEO This program lends an enthusiastic atmosphere to the sound, giving you the feeling you are at an actual jazz or rock concert. ENTERTAINMENT: Game This program adds a deep and spatial feeling to video game sounds. TV THEATER: Mono Movie This program is provided for reproducing monaural video sources (such as old movies). The program produces the optimum reverberation to create sound depth using only the presernce sound field. TV THEATER: Variety/Sports Though the presence sound field is relatively narrow, the surround sound field employs the sound environment of a large concert hall. This effect enhances the experience of watching various TV programs such as news, variety shows, music programs or sports programs. MOVIE THEATER: Spectacle CINEMA DSP processing. This program creates the extremely wide sound field of a 70-mm movie theater. It precisely reproduces the source sound in detail, making both the video and the sound field incredibly real. This is ideal for any kind of video source encoded with Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS (especially large-scale movie productions). MOVIE THEATER: Sci-Fi CINEMA DSP processing. This program clearly reproduces dialog and sound effects in the latest sound form for science fiction films, thus creating a broad and expansive cinematic space amid silence. You can enjoy science fiction films in a virtual-space sound field that includes Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital and DTS-encoded software employing the most advanced techniques. MOVIE THEATER: Adventure CINEMA DSP processing. This program is ideal for precisely reproducing the sound design of the newest 70-mm and multichannel soundtrack films. The sound field is made to be similar to that of the newest movie theaters, so the reverberations of the sound field itself are restrained as much as possible. MOVIE THEATER: General CINEMA DSP processing. This program is for reproducing sounds from 70-mm and multichannel soundtrack films, and is characterized by soft and extensive sound field. 44 Sources MULTI 2-CH 00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 45 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS Program Features DOLBY DIGITAL: SUR. STANDARD Standard 5.1-channel processing for Dolby Digital sources. DOLBY DIGITAL: SUR. ENHANCED CINEMA DSP enhanced processing for Dolby Digital sources. q D+PLIIx Movie: SUR. STANDARD Standard 6.1/7.1-channel processing (Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie) for Dolby Digital sources. q D+PLIIx Movie: SUR. ENHANCED CINEMA DSP enhanced 6.1/7.1-channel processing (Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie) for Dolby Digital sources. DOLBY D EX: SUR. STANDARD Standard 6.1-channel processing for Dolby Digital sources. DOLBY D EX: SUR. ENHANCED CINEMA DSP enhanced 6.1-channel processing (Dolby Digital EX) for Dolby Digital sources. DTS: SUR. STANDARD Standard 5.1-channel processing for DTS sources. DTS 96/24: SUR. STANDARD Standard 5.1-channel processing for 96-kHz/24-bit DTS sources. DTS: SUR. ENHANCED CINEMA DSP enhanced processing for DTS and 96-kHz/24-bit DTS sources. DTS+PLIIx Movie: SUR. STANDARD Standard 6.1/7.1-channel processing (Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie) for DTS sources. DTS+PLIIx Movie: SUR. ENHANCED CINEMA DSP enhanced 6.1/7.1-channel processing (Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie) for DTS sources. DTS+DOLBY EX: SUR. STANDARD Standard 6.1-channel processing (Dolby Digital EX) for DTS sources. DTS+DOLBY EX: SUR. ENHANCED CINEMA DSP enhanced 6.1-channel processing (Dolby Digital EX) for DTS sources. DTS ES Mtrx6.1: SUR. STANDARD Standard 6.1-channel processing (DTS-ES Matrix) for DTS sources. DTS ES Mtrx6.1: SUR. ENHANCED CINEMA DSP enhanced processing (DTS-ES Matrix) for DTS sources. DTS ES Disc6.1: SUR. STANDARD Standard 6.1-channel processing (DTS-ES Discrete) for DTS sources. DTS ES Disc6.1: SUR. ENHANCED CINEMA DSP enhanced processing (DTS-ES Discrete) for DTS sources. Sources MULTI SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS MULTI English 45 00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 46 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS Program Features PRO LOGIC: SUR. STANDARD Standard processing for Dolby Surround sources. PRO LOGIC: SUR. ENHANCED CINEMA DSP enhanced processing for Dolby Surround sources. PRO LOGIC IIx: PLIIx Movie Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for movie software.* PRO LOGIC II: PLII Movie Dolby Pro Logic II processing for movie software.* PRO LOGIC IIx: PLIIx Game Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for game software.* PRO LOGIC II: PLII Game Dolby Pro Logic II processing for game software.* DTS: Neo:6 Cinema DTS processing for movie software. * You can select either Pro Logic IIx or Pro Logic II processing using the PLII/PLIIx parameter on page 72. 46 Sources 2-CH 00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 47 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS For music sources You can select from the following sound fields when playing music sources, like CD, FM/AM broadcasting, tapes, etc. Program Features CONCERT HALL HiFi DSP processing. A classic shoe-box type concert hall with approximately 1700 seats. Pillars and ornate carvings create extremely complex reflections which produce a very full, rich sound. JAZZ CLUB HiFi DSP processing. This is the sound field at stage front in “The Bottom Line”, a famous New York jazz club. The floor can seat 300 people to the left and right in a sound field offering a real and vibrant sound. ROCK CONCERT HiFi DSP processing. The ideal program for lively, dynamic rock music. The data for this program was recorded at LA’s “hottest” rock club. The listener’s virtual seat is at the centerleft of the hall. ENTERTAINMENT: Disco HiFi DSP processing. This program recreates the acoustic environment of a lively disco in the heart of a big city. The sound is dense and highly concentrated. It is also characterized by highenergy, “immediate” sound. q D+PLIIx Music: SUR. STANDARD Standard Dolby Digital and Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for music sources. q D+PLIIx Music: SUR. ENHANCED CINEMA DSP enhanced Dolby Digital and Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for music sources. DTS+PLIIx Music: SUR. STANDARD Standard DTS and Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for music sources. DTS+PLIIx Music: SUR. ENHANCED CINEMA DSP enhanced DTS and Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for music sources. STEREO: 2ch Stereo 2-channel (left and right) playback. STEREO: 7ch Stereo Use to increase the output stereo sources (in stereo) from all speakers. This provides a larger sound field and is ideal for background music at parties, etc. PRO LOGIC IIx: PLIIx Music Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for music software.* PRO LOGIC II: PLII Music Dolby Pro Logic II processing for music software.* DTS: Neo:6 Music DTS processing for music software. Sources MULTI 2-CH MULTI SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS * You can select either Pro Logic IIx or Pro 2-CH Logic II processing using the PLII/PLIIx parameter on page 72. English 47 00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 48 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM ADVANCED OPERATIONS ADVANCED OPERATIONS Selecting the OSD mode You can display this unit’s operating information on a video monitor. If you display the SET MENU and sound field program parameter settings on a monitor, it is much easier to see the available options and parameters than it is by reading this information on the front panel display. 1 Turn on the video monitor connected to this unit. 2 Press ON SCREEN repeatedly to change the OSD mode. The OSD mode changes in the ON SCREEN DISPLAY following order: full display, short display, and display off. Using the sleep timer Use this feature to automatically set this unit in the standby mode after a certain amount of time. The sleep timer is useful when you are going to sleep while this unit is playing or recording a source. The sleep timer also automatically turns off any external components connected to the AC OUTLET(S). ■ Setting the sleep timer CODE SET Full display Always shows the sound field program parameter settings as well as the contents of the front panel display. Short display Briefly shows the contents of the front panel display at the bottom of the screen each time you operate this unit. Display off Only operations performed using ON SCREEN are displayed. The OSD is displayed when using SET MENU or the test tone feature, even if the OSD mode is set to “Display off”. TRANSMIT SYSTEM STANDBY POWER POWER POWER TV AV CD MD/CD-R TUNER SLEEP DVD DTV/CBL V-AUX MULTI CH IN VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 TV VOL TV CH TV MUTE TV INPUT 2 AMP VOLUME 1 Select a source and start playback on the source component. 2 Press SLEEP repeatedly to set the amount of time. Each time you press SLEEP, the front panel display changes as shown below. The SLEEP indicator flashes while switching the amount of time for the sleep timer. SLEEP P08 MOVIE THEATER SLEEP 120min .General DSPLEVEL;;;;0dB P.INIT.DLY;;15ms P.ROOMSIZE;;1.0 S.INIT.DLY;;20ms S.ROOMSIZE;;1.0 SLEEP OFF P08MOVIETHEATER General Full display Short display Notes • The OSD signal is not output to the REC OUT jack, and will not be recorded. • You can set the OSD to turn on (gray background) or off when a video source is not being reproduced (or the source component is turned off) by using “DISPLAY SET” (see page 58). t 96 24 q EX q PL q PL q PL x PCM SLEEP 30min VCR-1 V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD NIGHT ZONE2 SLEEP SLEEP 60min MD/CD-R PTY HOLD AUTO HiFi DSP PS TUNER CD TUNED STEREO MEMORY MUTE VOLUME PTY RT CT EON 1E SLEEP8120minz dB ft mS dB 96/24 L C R LFE SL SB SR The SLEEP indicator lights up in the front panel display, and the display returns to the selected sound field program. SLEEP indicator t 96 24 q EX q PL DVR/VCR2 VCR-1 SILENT CINEMA MATRIX DISCRETE VIRTUAL SP AB q DIGITAL q PL q PL x PCM 48 DVR/VCR2 SILENT CINEMA MATRIX DISCRETE VIRTUAL SP AB q DIGITAL SLEEP 90min V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD NIGHT ZONE2 SLEEP MD/CD-R PTY HOLD AUTO HiFi DSP PS TUNER CD TUNED STEREO MEMORY MUTE VOLUME PTY RT CT EON 1E CONCERT2HALLz dB ft mS dB 96/24 L C R LFE SL SB SR 00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 49 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM ADVANCED OPERATIONS ■ Canceling the sleep timer Press SLEEP repeatedly until “SLEEP OFF” appears in the front panel display. After a few seconds, “SLEEP OFF” disappears, and the SLEEP indicator goes off. SLEEP SLEEP OFF y Manually adjusting speaker levels You can adjust the output level of each speaker while listening to a music source. This is also possible when playing sources through the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. Please note that this operation will override the level adjustments made in “AUTO SETUP” (page 25), “SPEAKER LEVEL” (page 55) and “Using the test tone” (page 50). The sleep timer setting can also be canceled by pressing STANDBY on the remote control (or STANDBY/ON on the front panel) to set this unit to the standby mode. VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 TV VOL TV CH AMP 1 VOLUME TV MUTE TV INPUT STEREO HALL JAZZ 1 2 3 4 MUSIC ENTERTAIN TV THTR MOVIE 5 6 7 8 q/DTS NIGHT EX/ES STRAIGHT 9 0 MUTE 10 ROCK ENTER EFFECT 2 LEVEL PRESET/CH TITLE SET MENU MENU A/B/C/D/E SELECT TEST ON SCREEN RETURN DISPLAY REC AUDIO 4 3 1 Press AMP. 2 Press LEVEL repeatedly to select the speaker you want to adjust. Front left speaker level Center speaker level Front right speaker level Surround right speaker level Surround back right speaker level Surround back left speaker level Surround left speaker level Subwoofer level Presence speaker level y Once you press LEVEL, you can also select the speaker by pressing u / d. 3 Press j / i to adjust the speaker output level. The control range is from +10 dB to –10 dB. 4 Press SELECT when you have completed your adjustment. ADVANCED OPERATION FRONT L CENTER FRONT R SUR.R SUR.B.R SUR.B.L SUR.L SWFR PRES y This operation can also be performed using the controls on the front panel. Press NEXT repeatedly to select the speaker you want to adjust, then press LEVEL –/+ to adjust the output level. English 49 00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 50 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM ADVANCED OPERATIONS ■ Outputting the test tone from the PRESENCE speakers Using the test tone You can use the test tone feature to manually balance your speaker levels. Please note that this operation will override the level adjustments made in “AUTO SETUP” (page 25), “SPEAKER LEVEL” (page 55) and “Manually adjusting speaker levels” (page 49). Use the test tone to set speaker levels so that the volume from each speaker is identical when heard from your listening position. Note You cannot activate the test tone if headphones are connected to the PHONES jack. Remove the headphones from the PHONES jack. VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 TV VOL TV CH AMP 1 VOLUME TV MUTE TV INPUT STEREO HALL JAZZ 1 2 3 4 MUSIC ENTERTAIN TV THTR MOVIE 5 6 7 8 q/DTS NIGHT EX/ES STRAIGHT 9 0 MUTE ROCK 10 ENTER EFFECT LEVEL PRESET/CH SET MENU TITLE MENU A/B/C/D/E SELECT 2,5,8 TEST RETURN ON SCREEN DISPLAY REC AUDIO 3,4,6,7 1 Press AMP. 2 Press TEST. The unit outputs a test tone. 3 Press u / d repeatedly to select the speaker you want to adjust. TEST TEST TEST TEST TEST TEST TEST TEST LEFT CENTER RIGHT SUR.R SUR.B.R SUR.B.L SUR.L SUBWOOFER Front left speaker Center speaker Front right speaker Right surround speaker Right surround back speaker Left surround back speaker Left surround speaker Subwoofer 4 Press j / i to adjust the speaker volumes. 5 Press TEST when you have completed your adjustment. The test tone stops. If PRESENCE SP in “SPEAKER SET” is set to YES, you can adjust the presence speaker volumes (proceed to step 6). 50 6 Press u / d repeatedly to select the speaker from which you want to output the test tone. TEST TEST TEST TEST FRONT PRESENCE PRES L PRES R Front speakers Presence speakers Left presence speakers Right presence speakers 7 Press j / i to adjust the presence speaker volumes. 8 Press TEST when you have completed your adjustment. The test tone stops. 00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 51 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM SET MENU SET MENU You can use the following parameters in SET MENU to adjust a variety of system settings and customize the way this unit operates. Change the initial settings (indicated in bold under each parameter) to reflect the needs of your listening environment. ■ AUTO SETUP Use to specify which speaker parameters auto setup will adjust, and to activate the auto setup procedure (see page 25). ■ MANUAL SETUP Use to manually adjust speaker and system parameters. 1 SOUND MENU Use to manually adjust any speaker setting, alter the quality and tone of the sound output by the system or compensate for video signal processing delays when using LCD monitors or projectors. y Most of the parameters described in SOUND MENU are set automatically when you run auto setup (see page 25). You can use SOUND MENU to make further adjustments, but we recommend running auto setup first. Item Features Page A)SPEAKER SET Selects the size of each speaker, the speakers for low-frequency signal output, and the cross over frequency. 53 B)SPEAKER LEVEL Adjusts the output level of each speaker. 55 C)SP DISTANCE Adjusts the delay time of each speaker. 55 D)CENTER GEQ Adjusts the tonal quality of the center speaker. 56 E)LFE LEVEL Adjusts the output level of the LFE channel for Dolby Digital or DTS signals. 56 F)DYNAMIC RANGE Adjusts the dynamic range for Dolby Digital or DTS signals. 56 G)AUDIO SET Customizes the muting level, audio delay and height of the front and center channel sounds. 56 H)PR/SB SELECT Selects priority to either surround back or presence speakers when both sets of speakers are connected to this unit. 57 Item Features Page A)I/O ASSIGNMENT Assigns jacks according to the component to be used. 57 B)INPUT MODE 58 Selects the initial input mode of the source. ADVANCED OPERATION 2 INPUT MENU Use to reassign digital input/outputs and select the input mode. 3 OPTION MENU Use to adjust the optional system parameters. Item Features Page Adjusts the brightness of the display and converts video signals. 58 B)MEMORY GUARD Locks sound field program parameters and other SET MENU settings. 59 C)PARAM. INI Initializes the parameters of a group of sound field programs. 59 D)ZONE SET Specifies the location of the speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals. 59 E)ZONE2 SET Selects how the ZONE 2 speakers will be amplified. 59 English A)DISPLAY SET 51 00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 52 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM SET MENU Using SET MENU 4 Use the remote control to access and adjust each parameter. Press SELECT to enter MANUAL SETUP. 1 SOUND MENU appears on the front panel display. ;MANUAL SETUP PRESET/CH VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 TV VOL TV CH TV MUTE TV INPUT AMP .1SOUNDMENU 2INPUTMENU 3OPTIONMENU 1 SELECT VOLUME p p []/[]:Up/Down [SELECT]:Enter MUTE STEREO HALL JAZZ ROCK 1 2 3 4 MUSIC ENTERTAIN TV THTR MOVIE 5 6 7 8 q/DTS NIGHT EX/ES STRAIGHT 9 0 10 ENTER EFFECT LEVEL PRESET/CH TITLE SET MENU MENU A/B/C/D/E 2,8 5 Press u / d to select the desired menu. 6 Press SELECT to enter the selected menu. SELECT TEST RETURN ON SCREEN DISPLAY REC AUDIO 3-7 1 SOUND MENU 1/2 PRESET/CH y You can change SET MENU parameters while the unit is reproducing sound. SELECT p Note p .A)SPEAKERSET B)SPEAKERLEVEL C)SPDISTANCE D)CENTERGEQ []/[]:Up/Down [SELECT]:Enter You cannot change some SET MENU parameters while the unit is in either cinema or music night listening mode. 1 7 Press AMP. AMP Press u / d to select the item you want to adjust, then press j / i to change the setting of the item. B)SPEAKER LEVEL 2 -+ .FR C SL Press SET MENU. SET MENU MENU A/B/C/D/E 3 Press u / d to select MANUAL SETUP. PRESET/CH Repeat this operation to select and adjust each setting. To return to the previous menu level, press RETURN. SET MENU ;AUTOSETUP .;MANUALSETUP SELECT 8 To exit, press SET MENU when finished. p p []/[]:Up/Down [SELECT]:Enter SET MENU MENU A/B/C/D/E Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode. However, if the power cord is disconnected from the AC outlet, or the power supply is cut for more than one week, the stored data will be lost. If so, adjust the items again. 52 00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 53 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM SET MENU 1 SOUND MENU Use to manually adjust any speaker setting or compensate for video signal processing delays when using LCD monitors or projectors. Most of the SOUND MENU parameters are set automatically when you run auto setup (see page 25). Front speakers FRONT SP Choices: SMALL, LARGE FRONT SP SMALL)LARGE 1 SOUND MENU 1/2 p p .A)SPEAKERSET B)SPEAKERLEVEL C)SPDISTANCE D)CENTERGEQ []/[]:Up/Down [SELECT]:Enter ■ Speaker set A)SPEAKER SET Use to manually adjust any speaker setting. y If you are not satisfied with the bass sounds from your speakers, you can change these settings according to your preference. Center speaker CENTER SP Choices: NONE, SML, LRG CENTER SP NONE)SMLLRG Surround left/right speakers SURR L/R SP Choices: NONE, SML, LRG SURR L/R SP NONE)SMLLRG • Select NONE if you do not have surround speakers. This will set the unit to the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode (see page 36) and automatically set the surround back speaker setting (SURR B L/R SP) to NONE. • Select SML if you have small surround left and right speakers. The low-frequency signals of the surround channel are directed to the speakers selected with “LFE/BASS OUT”. • Select LRG if you have large surround left and right speakers. The entire range of the surround channel signal is directed to the surround left and right speakers. ADVANCED OPERATION • Select NONE if you do not have a center speaker. The unit directs all of the center channel signal to the front left and right speakers. • Select SML if you have a small center speaker. The unit directs the low-frequency signals of the center channel to the speakers selected with “LFE/BASS OUT”. • Select LRG if you have a large center speaker. The unit directs the entire range of the center channel signal to the center speaker. • Select SMALL if you have small front speakers. The unit directs the low-frequency signals of the front channel to the speakers selected with “LFE/BASS OUT”. • Select LARGE if you have large front speakers. The unit directs the entire range of the front left and right channel signals to the front left and right speakers. English 53 00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 54 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM SET MENU Surround back speakers SURR B L/R SP Choices: NONE, SMLx1, SMLx2, LRGx1, LRGx2 SURR B L/R SP Bass out LFE/BASS OUT Low-frequency (bass) signals can be directed to the subwoofer and/or the front left and right speakers according to the characteristics of your system. This setting also determines the routing of the LFE (lowfrequency effect) signals found in Dolby Digital or DTS sources. Choices: SWFR, FRNT, BOTH SMLx1)SMLx2 • Select NONE if you do not have a surround back speaker. The unit directs all of the surround back channel signal to the surround left and right speakers. • Select SMLx1 if you have a small surround back speaker. The low-frequency signals of the surround back channel are directed to the speakers selected with “LFE/BASS OUT”, and the rest of the frequency signals are directed to the left surround back speaker. • Select SMLx2 if you have 2 small surround back speakers. The low-frequency signals of the surround back channels are directed to the speakers selected with “LFE/BASS OUT”. • Select LRGx1 if you have a large surround back speaker. The unit directs the entire range of the surround back channel signal to the left surround back speaker. • Select LRGx2 if you have 2 large surround back speakers. The unit directs the entire range of the surround back channel signal to the surround back speakers. Note If you select SMLx1 or LRGx1, connect the speaker to the left SURROUND BACK speaker terminals. Presence speakers PRESENCE SP Choices: NONE, YES LFE/BASS OUT SWFRFRNT)BOTH • Select SWFR if you connect a subwoofer. LFE and low-frequency signals from other channels are directed to the subwoofer according to the speaker settings. • Select FRNT if you do not use a subwoofer. LFE and low frequency signals from other channels are directed to the front speakers according to the speaker settings (even if you have previously set front speakers to SML). • Select BOTH if you connect a subwoofer and you want to output low-frequency signals from front channels to both the front speakers and subwoofer. LFE and lowfrequency signals from other channels are also directed to the subwoofer according to the speaker settings. Use this function to reinforce low-frequency signals using the subwoofer when playing back sources such as CDs. Cross over CROSS OVER Use this feature to select a cross-over (cut-off) frequency for all low-frequency signals. All frequencies below the selected frequency will be sent to the subwoofer. Choices: 40Hz, 60Hz, 80Hz, 90Hz, 100Hz, 110Hz, 120Hz, 160Hz, 200Hz PRESENCE SP CROSS OVER )NONEYES FREQ;;;80Hz • Select NONE if you do not have presence speakers. • Select YES if you have presence speakers. 54 00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 55 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM SET MENU Subwoofer phase SUBWOOFER PHASE If bass sounds are lacking or unclear, use this feature to switch the phase of your subwoofer. Choices: NORMAL (normal), REVERSE (reverse) 02ASUBWOOFER PHASE ■ Speaker distance C)SP DISTANCE Use this feature to manually input the distance of each speaker and adjust the delay applied to respective channel. Ideally, each speaker should be the same distance from the main listening position. However, this is not possible in most home situations. Thus, a certain amount of delay must be applied to the sound from each speaker so that all sound will arrive at the listening position at the same time. C)SP DISTANCE )NORMALREVERSE ■ Speaker level B)SPEAKER LEVEL Use these settings to manually balance the speaker levels between the front left or surround left speakers and each speaker selected in SPEAKER SET (page 53). Choices: –10.0 dB to +10.0 dB B)SPEAKER LEVEL -+ .FR C SL * SB will be displayed if you selected only one surround back speaker in SURR B L/R SP (page 54). Unit UNIT Choices: meters (m), feet (ft) Initial setting: U.S.A. and Canada models: feet (ft) Other models: meters (m) • Select meters to input speaker distances in meters. • Select feet to input speaker distances in feet. Speaker distances Choices: 0.3 to 24.00 m (1 to 80 ft) • FRONT L adjusts the distance of the front left speaker. Initial setting: 3.0 m (10.0 ft) • FRONT R adjusts the distance of the front right speaker. Initial setting: 3.0 m (10.0 ft) • CENTER adjusts the distance of the center speaker. Initial setting: 3.0 m (10.0 ft) • SURR L adjusts the distance of the surround left speaker. Initial setting: 3.0 m (10.0 ft) • SURR R adjusts the distance of the surround right speaker. Initial setting: 3.0 m (10.0 ft) • SB L* adjusts the distance of the surround back left speaker. Initial setting: 2.10 m (7.0 ft) • SB R* adjusts the distance of the surround back right speaker. Initial setting: 2.10 m (7.0 ft) • SWFR adjusts the distance of the subwoofer. Initial setting: 3.0 m (10.0 ft) • PRES L adjusts the distance of the presence left speaker. Initial setting: 3.0 m (10.0 ft) • PRES R adjusts the distance of the presence right speaker. Initial setting: 3.0 m (10.0 ft) * ADVANCED OPERATION • FR adjusts the balance of the front left and front right speakers. • C adjusts the balance of the front left and center speakers. • SL adjusts the balance of the front left and surround left speakers. • SBL* adjusts the balance of the surround left and surround back left speakers. • SBR* adjusts the balance of the surround left and surround back right speakers. • SR adjusts the balance of the surround left and surround right speakers. • SWFR adjusts the balance of the front left speaker and subwoofer. • PRES adjusts the balance of the front and presence speakers. p • Select NORMAL if you do not want to reverse the phase of your subwoofer. • Select REVERSE to reverse the phase of your subwoofer. p . UNIT;;;;;;meters FRONTL;;;;3.00m FRONTR;;;;3.00m CENTER;;;;;3.00m []/[]:Up/Down [<]/[>]:Adjust SURR B will be displayed if you selected only one surround back speaker in SURR B L/R SP (page 54). y To calibrate, use the test tone feature (see page 50). English 55 00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 56 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM SET MENU ■ Center graphic equalizer D)CENTER GEQ ■ Dynamic range F)DYNAMIC RANGE Use this feature to adjust the built-in 5-band graphic equalizer for the center channel so that the tonal quality of the center speaker matches that of the front speakers. You can make adjustments listening to the currently selected source component or a test tone. You can adjust 5 frequency bands: 100Hz, 300Hz, 1kHz, 3kHz, 10kHz Choices: –6 to +6 dB Use to select the amount of dynamic range compression to be applied to your speakers or headphones. This setting is effective only when the unit is decoding Dolby Digital and DTS signals. Choices: MIN (minimum), STD (standard), MAX (maximum) D)CENTER GEQ p p []/[]:Up/Down [<]/[>]:Select p p .TEST)OFFON -+ 100Hz0dB 300Hz0dB 1kHz0dB 3kHz0dB 10kHz0dB []/[]:Up/Down [<]/[>]:Adjust F)DYNAMIC RANGE .SP:MINSTD)MAX HP:MINSTD)MAX • Select ON to output test tones from the front left and center speakers, and adjust the tonal quality of the center speaker. • Select OFF to stop the test tone and output the currently selected source component. • Press u / d to select a frequency band. • Press j / i to adjust the selected frequency band. Headphone HP Select to adjust the headphone compression. • Select MIN if you regularly listen at low volume levels. • Select STD for general use. • Select MAX to preserve the greatest amount of dynamic range. ■ Audio set G)AUDIO SET Use to customize this units overall audio settings. G)AUDIO SET .AUDIOMUTE;;MUTE AUDIODELAY;;0ms DIALG.LIFT;;;OFF p []/[]:Up/Down [<]/[>]:Selet p ■ Low-frequency effect level E)LFE LEVEL Use to adjust the output level of the LFE (low-frequency effect) channel according to the capacity of your subwoofer or headphones. The LFE channel carries lowfrequency special effects which are only added to certain scenes. This setting is effective only when this unit decodes Dolby Digital or DTS signals. Choices: –20 to 0 dB Speaker SP Select to adjust the speaker compression. E)LFE LEVEL .SPEAKER;;;;;;0dB HEADPHONE;;;;0dB p p []/[]:Up/Down [<]/[>]:Adjust Speaker SPEAKER Select to adjust the speaker LFE level. Headphone HEADPHONE Select to adjust the headphone LFE level. Note Depending on the settings of “LFE LEVEL”, some signals may not be output from the SUB WOOFER OUTPUT jack. 56 Audio mute AUDIO MUTE Use to adjust how much the mute function reduces the output volume. Choices: MUTE, –20 dB • Select MUTE to completely halt all output of sound. • Select –20 dB to reduce the current volume by 20 dB. Audio delay AUDIO DELAY Use to delay the sound output and synchronize it with the video image. This may be necessary when using certain LCD monitors or projectors. Choices: 0 to 160 mS 00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 57 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM SET MENU Dialog lift DIALG.LIFT Use to turn on and off the DIALG.LIFT parameter (see page 72). This parameter adjusts the height of the front and center channel sounds (dialog, vocals, etc.) by assigning some of the front and center channel elements to the presence speakers. Choices: OFF, ON • Select OFF to turn off DIALG.LIFT effect. • Select ON to turn on DIALG.LIFT effect. 2 INPUT MENU Use to reassign digital input/outputs and select the input mode. 2 INPUTMENU .A)I/OASSIGNMENT B)INPUTMODE p p []/[]:Up/Down [SELECT]:Enter Note “DIALG.LIFT” appears only when “PRESENCE SP” is set to YES (see page 54). ■ Presence/surround back channel select H)PR/SB SELECT You can select to prioritize either the surround back or presence speakers when playing sources that contain surround back channel signals using CINEMA DSP sound field programs. Choices: PRch, SBch H)PR/SBSELECT PRch)SBch ASSIGNMENT You can assign jacks according to the component to be used if this unit’s initial settings do not correspond to your needs. Change the following parameters to reassign the respective jacks and effectively connect more components. Once the inputs have been reassigned, you can select the corresponding component by using INPUT on the front panel or the input selector buttons on the remote control. For COMPONENT VIDEO jacks A and B Choices: DVD, V-AUX, DTV/CBL, VCR 1, DVR/VCR2 p p []/[]:Select [SELECT]:Return ■ Input/output assignment A)I/O CMPNT-VINPUT For OPTICAL OUTPUT jack 1 Choices: MD/CD-R, CD, V-AUX, DTV/CBL, VCR 1, DVD, DVR/VCR2 ADVANCED OPERATION • Select PRch to use presence speakers even when surround back channel signals are input. The signals for the surround back channel will be output from surround speakers. • Select SBch to use surround back speakers when a surround back channel signal is detected in a CINEMA DSP program. Presence channel signals will be output from front speakers. .[A];;;;;DVD (DVD) [B];;;;;DTV/CBL (DTV/CBL) OPTICALOUT .(1);;;;;MD/CD-R (MD/CD-R ) For OPTICAL INPUT jacks 2, 3 and 4 Choices: CD, DTV/CBL, VCR 1, DVD, DVR/VCR2, MD/CD-R OPTICALIN English .(2);;;;;MD/CD-R (MD/CD-R) (3);;;;; DVD (DVD ) (4);;;;;DTV/CBL (DTV/CBL ) 57 00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 58 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM SET MENU For COAXIAL INPUT jacks 5 and 6 Choices: CD, V-AUX, DTV/CBL, VCR 1, MD/CD-R, DVD, DVR/VCR2 3 OPTION MENU Use to adjust the optional system parameters. COAXIALIN 3 OPTIONMENU1/2 .(5);;;;; CD ( CD ) (6);;;;; DVD (DVD ) Notes p p .A)DISPLAYSET B)MEMORYGUARD C)PARAM.INI D)ZONESET []/[]:Up/Down [SELECT]:Enter ■ Display set A)DISPLAY SET • You cannot select a specific item more than once for the same type of jack. • When you connect a component to both the COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to the input signals from the COAXIAL jack. A)DISPLAYSET .DIMMER;;;;;;;;;0 VCONV;;;;;;;;ON OSDSHIFT;;;;;;0 GRAYBACK;;;AUTO ■ Input mode B)INPUT MODE [<]/[>]:Select [SELECT]:Return • Select AUTO to allow this unit to automatically detect the type of input signal and select the appropriate input mode. • Select LAST to set this unit to automatically select the last input mode used for that source. Note Even if LAST is selected, the last setting for the EX/ES button will not be recalled. p B)INPUTMODE )AUTOLAST []/[]:Up/Down [<]/[>]:sELECT p Use this feature to designate the input mode for sources connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn on this unit (see page 36 for details about the input mode). Choices: AUTO, LAST Dimmer DIMMER Use to adjust the brightness of the front panel display. Choices: –4 to 0 Video conversion V CONV. Use this feature to turn on/off conversion of composite (VIDEO) signals to S-Video signals. This allows you to output converted video signals from the S VIDEO jacks when no S-Video signals are input. Choices: ON, OFF • Select OFF not to convert any signals. • Select ON to convert composite signals to S-Video signals. Note Converted video signals are only output to the MONITOR OUT jacks. When recording you must make the same type of video connections (i.e., S-Video) between each component. OSD shift OSD SHIFT Use to adjust the vertical position of the OSD. Choices: +5 (downward) to –5 (upward) • Press + to lower the position of the OSD. • Press – to raise the position of the OSD. Gray back GRAY BACK Selecting AUTO for the on-screen display setting displays a gray background when there’s no video signal input. Nothing is displayed if OFF is selected. Choices: AUTO, OFF Note If “GRAY BACK” is set to OFF, no information will be displayed on the screen when video signals are not being input. 58 00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 59 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM SET MENU ■ Memory guard B)MEMORY GUARD ■ Zone set D)ZONE SET Use this feature to prevent accidental changes to DSP program parameter values and other system settings. Choices: OFF, ON Use to specify the location of speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals. D)ZONESET B)MEMORYGUARD SPB;;;;;;FRONT )OFFON [<]/[>]:Select [SELECT]:Return [<]/[>]:Select [SELECT]:Return Select ON to protect: • DSP program parameters • All SET MENU items • All speaker levels • The on-screen display (OSD) mode Note When “MEMORY GUARD” is set to ON, you cannot use the test tone or select any other SET MENU items. ■ Parameter initialization C)PARAM. INI Use this feature to initialize the parameters for each sound field program within a sound field program group. When you initialize a sound field program group, all of the parameter values within that group revert to their initial settings. Press the corresponding numeric button for the sound field program that you want to initialize. An asterisk (*) next to a program number means that the parameter values have been changed from their initial settings. Speaker B set SP B Use this feature to select the location of the front speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals. Choices: FRONT, ZONE B • Select FRONT to turn on/off SPEAKERS A and B when the speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals are set in the main room. • Select ZONE B if the speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals are set in another room. If SPEAKERS A is turned OFF and SPEAKERS B is turned ON, all the speakers including the subwoofer in the main room are muted and the unit outputs sound from SPEAKERS B only. Notes • If you connect headphones to the PHONES jack on the unit when “SP B” is set to ZONE B, the sound is output from both headphones and SPEAKERS B. • If a DSP program is selected when “SP B” is set to ZONE B, the unit automatically enters the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode. ■ Zone 2 setting E)ZONE2 SET (U.S.A., Canada and Australia models only) C)PARAM.INI 1234 E)ZONE2 SET ADVANCED OPERATION 567*8 ZONE2 AMP;;;OFF 9 p p / : Up/Down -/+ : Select Notes • You cannot automatically revert to the previous parameter settings once you initialize a sound field program group. • You cannot separately initialize individual sound field programs. • You cannot initialize any program groups when “MEMORY GUARD” is set to ON. Zone 2 amplifier ZONE2 AMP Use to select how the ZONE 2 speakers will be amplified. Choices: ON, OFF • Select OFF if you do not use Zone 2 speakers or if you connect your Zone 2 speakers through an external amplifiers connected to this unit’s ZONE 2 OUTPUT jacks. • Select ON to use this unit’s internal amplifier if you connect your Zone 2 speakers directly to this unit’s PRESENCE/ZONE 2 speaker terminals. English 59 00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 60 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES In addition to controlling this unit, the remote control can also operate other A/V components made by YAMAHA and other manufacturers. To control other components, you must set up remote control with the appropriate manufacturer codes. Control area ■ Controlling this unit ■ The shaded areas below can be used to control this unit when the AMP mode is selected. Press AMP to activate the AMP mode. The shaded areas below can be used to control other components. Each button has a different function depending on the selected component. Select the component you want to control by pressing an input selector button. CODE SET TRANSMIT SYSTEM STANDBY POWER MD/CD-R TUNER SLEEP DTV/CBL V-AUX MULTI CH IN POWER POWER TV AV CD DVD AMP VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 TV VOL TV CH TV MUTE TV INPUT STEREO HALL JAZZ ROCK 1 2 3 4 MUSIC ENTERTAIN TV THTR MOVIE 5 6 7 8 q/DTS NIGHT EX/ES STRAIGHT 9 0 VOLUME The buttons in the dotted lines (SYSTEM POWER, STANDBY, SLEEP, MULTI CH IN, VOLUME +/– and MUTE) function in any mode. Controlling other components The button and input selector buttons switch the function of the component control area below. * Use the button to control other components regardless of whether they are connected to this unit. CODE SET TRANSMIT SYSTEM STANDBY POWER MD/CD-R TUNER SLEEP DVD DTV/CBL V-AUX MULTI CH IN VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 POWER POWER TV AV CD AMP MUTE 10 VOLUME TVTV VOL TVTV CHCH VOL TV VOL TVTV CHCH TV VOL TV VOL TVTV CHCH TV VOL TV VOL TVTV CHCH TV VOL TV VOL TVTV CHCH TV VOL TV VOL TV CH Press AMP to control this unit. TVTV MUTE TVTV INPUT MUTE INPUT TV MUTE TV INPUT TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE TV MUTE TV INPUT TV MUTE TV INPUT TV MUTE TV INPUT TV MUTE TV INPUT TV MUTE TV INPUT TV MUTE TV INPUT TV MUTE TV INPUT ENTER EFFECT LEVEL PRESET/CH TITLE SET MENU MENU A/B/C/D/E SELECT TEST ON SCREEN RETURN DISPLAY REC AUDIO DISC SKIP 60 Component control area You can control up to 9 different components by setting appropriate manufacturer codes (see page 61). STEREO HALL JAZZ ROCK STEREO HALL JAZZ ROCK STEREO HALL JAZZ ROCK HALL 3 JAZZ JAZZ 4 ROCK 1STEREO 22HALL ROCK 1STEREO 44ROCK HALL 33 JAZZ ROCK 1STEREO 22HALL JAZZ 1STEREO 33JAZZ HALL JAZZ 44 ROCK 1STEREO 22HALL STEREO HALL ROCK 1STEREO 3 4 ROCK HALL 3 JAZZ 11STEREOTV 22 33JAZZ 444ROCK MUSIC ENTERTAIN THTR MOVIE 1 2 MUSIC ENTERTAIN TV THTR MOVIE 1 2 33 44 MUSIC ENTERTAIN TV THTR MOVIE 1 2 ENTERTAIN TV THTR MOVIE MUSIC ENTERTAIN TV THTR MOVIE 55MUSIC 6 7 8 MUSIC ENTERTAIN TV THTR MOVIE 66ENTERTAIN 77 TV THTR 88 MOVIE 55 MUSIC ENTERTAIN THTR 66 77TVTV 88 MOVIE MUSIC ENTERTAIN THTR MOVIE 55MUSIC ENTERTAIN THTR 77TVTV 88 MOVIE MUSIC66 ENTERTAIN THTR MOVIE 55MUSIC 6 7 8 q/DTS NIGHT EX/ES STRAIGHT 55 66 77 88 q/DTS NIGHT EX/ES STRAIGHT q/DTS NIGHT EX/ES STRAIGHT 5 6 7 8 q/DTS EX/ES STRAIGHT q/DTS NIGHT 10 EX/ES ENTER STRAIGHT 99 00NIGHT q/DTS STRAIGHT ENTER q/DTS NIGHT10 EX/ES STRAIGHT ENTER 99 00NIGHT 10EX/ES q/DTS EX/ES STRAIGHT ENTER q/DTS NIGHT10 EX/ES STRAIGHT ENTER 99 0 NIGHT 10 q/DTS EX/ES STRAIGHT ENTER 10 EFFECT q/DTS00 NIGHT EX/ES STRAIGHT ENTER 99 EFFECT ENTER 00NIGHT 10 10 EFFECT ENTER 99 10 EFFECT ENTER 00 10 EFFECT PRESET/CH ENTER 9 10 EFFECT LEVEL SET MENU PRESET/CH EFFECT LEVEL SET MENU PRESET/CH EFFECT LEVEL SET MENU PRESET/CH EFFECT LEVEL SET MENU PRESET/CH EFFECT LEVEL SET MENU TITLE MENU PRESET/CH EFFECT LEVEL SET MENU TITLE MENU PRESET/CH LEVEL SET MENU TITLE MENU PRESET/CH LEVEL SET MENU TITLE MENU PRESET/CH LEVEL SET MENU TITLE MENU A/B/C/D/E PRESET/CH LEVEL SET MENU TITLE MENU A/B/C/D/E PRESET/CH LEVEL SET MENU TITLE MENU A/B/C/D/E TITLE MENU A/B/C/D/E TITLE MENU A/B/C/D/E TITLE MENU A/B/C/D/E SELECT TITLE MENU A/B/C/D/E SELECT A/B/C/D/E SELECT A/B/C/D/E SELECT A/B/C/D/E SELECT A/B/C/D/E SELECT TEST ON SCREEN SELECT TEST SELECT TEST SELECT TEST SELECT RETURN DISPLAY TEST SELECT RETURN DISPLAY TEST RETURN DISPLAY TEST RETURN DISPLAY TEST RETURN DISPLAY TEST RETURN DISPLAY TEST RETURN DISPLAY TEST ON SCREEN RETURN DISPLAY REC RETURN DISPLAY REC RETURN DISPLAY REC RETURN DISPLAY REC AUDIO REC AUDIO REC AUDIO REC AUDIO REC AUDIO REC DISC SKIP AUDIO REC DISC SKIP AUDIO REC DISC SKIP AUDIO DISC SKIP AUDIO DISC SKIP AUDIO DISC SKIP AUDIO DISC SKIP DISC SKIP DISC SKIP DISC SKIP DISC SKIP 00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 61 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES Setting manufacturer codes 1 You can control other components by setting the appropriate manufacturer codes. Codes can be set up for each input area. For a complete list of available manufacturer codes, refer to “LIST OF MANUFACTURER CODES” at the end of this manual. Press an input selector button or to select the component you want to set up. The following table shows the factory preset component (Library: component category) and the manufacturer code for each area. 2 Component category (Library) Manufacturer CD CD YAMAHA 0005 MD/CD-R MD YAMAHA 0024 Input area Code TUNER TUNER YAMAHA 0023*1 0003*2 DVD DVD YAMAHA 0098 DTV/CBL – – – V-AUX – – – VCR 1 – – – DVR/VCR2 – – – – – – CD MD/CD-R TUNER SLEEP DVD DTV/CBL V-AUX MULTI CH IN VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 AMP Press CODE SET using a ballpoint pen or similar object. The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control flashes twice. TRANSMIT CODE SET 3 Press the numeric buttons to enter the four digit manufacturer’s code for the component to be used. Refer to “LIST OF MANUFACTURER CODES” at the end of this manual. *1 U.K. and Europe models *2 Other models Note You may not be able to operate your YAMAHA component even if a YAMAHA manufacturer code is initially set as listed above. In this case, try to set other YAMAHA manufacturer code(s). STEREO HALL JAZZ 1 2 3 ROCK 4 MUSIC ENTERTAIN TV THTR MOVIE 5 6 7 8 q/DTS NIGHT EX/ES STRAIGHT 9 0 10 ENTER EFFECT The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control flashes twice. • If the manufacturer of your component has more than one code, try each of them until you find the correct one. • If you wait for more than 30 seconds during step 3, the setup process is canceled. If this happens, start over from step 2. ADVANCED OPERATION Notes English 61 00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 62 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES Controlling other components Once you set the appropriate manufacturer codes, you can use this remote to control your other components. Note that some buttons may not correctly operate the selected component. Use the input selector buttons to select the component you want to operate. The remote control automatically switches to the appropriate control mode for that component. 1 2 CODE SET TRANSMIT STEREO HALL JAZZ 1 2 3 4 MUSIC ENTERTAIN TV THTR MOVIE SYSTEM POWER POWER TV AV CD MD/CD-R DVD DTV/CBL VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 POWER STANDBY TUNER 7 SLEEP 5 6 7 8 q/DTS NIGHT EX/ES STRAIGHT 9 0 MULTI CH IN V-AUX ROCK 10 ENTER B EFFECT 8 9 0 AMP 3 4 TV VOL TV CH VOLUME LEVEL PRESET/CH SET MENU TITLE MENU A/B/C/D/E C SELECT TEST ON SCREEN RETURN DISPLAY D REC 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 A B C D *1 TV MUTE A TV INPUT MUTE STEREO HALL JAZZ ROCK 1 2 3 4 DVD player/ DVD recorder VCR Digital TV/ Cable TV CD player AV POWER Power *1 Power *1 VCR power *3 TV POWER TV power *2 TV power *2 TV power TV CH + TV channel up *2 TV channel up *2 TV CH – TV channel down *2 TV channel down *2 TV VOL + TV volume up *2 TV volume up *2 AUDIO DISC SKIP MD/CD recorder Tuner Power *1 Power *1 Power *1 TV power *2 TV power *2 TV power *2 TV channel up TV channel up *2 TV channel up *2 TV channel up *2 TV channel down TV channel down *2 TV channel down *2 TV channel down *2 TV volume up TV volume up *2 TV volume up *2 TV volume up *2 TV VOL – TV volume down *2 TV volume down *2 TV volume down TV volume down *2 TV volume down *2 TV volume down *2 TV MUTE TV mute *2 TV mute *2 TV mute TV mute *2 TV mute *2 TV mute *2 TV INPUT TV input *2 TV input *2 TV input TV input *2 TV input *2 TV input *2 1-9, 0, +10 Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Preset stations (1-8) TITLE Title PRESET/CH u Up VCR channel up Preset up PRESET/CH d Down VCR channel down Preset down PRESET/CH j Right PRESET/CH i Left RETURN Return REC/DISC SKIP Disc skip (player) Rec (recorder) p Play Play VCR play *3 Play w Search backward Search backward VCR search backward *3 Search backward f Search forward Search forward VCR search forward *3 Search forward Pause VCR pause *3 Rec VCR rec *3 Rec (MD) Play Search backward Search forward AUDIO Audio e Pause b Skip backward a Skip forward Skip forward Skip forward s Stop Stop VCR stop *3 Stop Stop ENTER Title/Index Enter Enter Index Index MENU Menu DISPLAY Display Display Display Display Pause Pause Skip backward Skip backward A/B/C/D/E This button functions only when the original remote control of the component has a POWER button. These buttons can operate your TV without switching the input if the manufacturer code is set in DTV/CBL or . When the manufacturer code for your TV is set up in both the DTV/CBL and areas, priority is given to the signal in the DTV/CBL area. *3 These buttons can operate your VCR without switching the input to VCR 1 if the manufacturer code is set in VCR 1. *2 62 00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 63 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES Clearing setup manufacturer codes ■ Clearing a setup manufacturer code for component control 1 2 Press an input selector button or to select the component control for which you want to clear the manufacturer code. CD MD/CD-R TUNER SLEEP DVD DTV/CBL V-AUX MULTI CH IN VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 AMP Press CODE SET using a ballpoint pen or similar object. The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control flashes twice. TRANSMIT CODE SET 3 If you do not press any button within 30 seconds after step 2, the clearing process is canceled. If this happens, start over from step 1. 4 Enter the code number “0000”. The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control flashes twice, and the manufacturer code for the selected component is cleared. ADVANCED OPERATION y You can clear all setup manufacturer codes at once by entering the code number “9990”. English 63 00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 64 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM ZONE 2 (U.S.A., CANADA AND AUSTRALIA MODELS ONLY) ZONE 2 (U.S.A., CANADA AND AUSTRALIA MODELS ONLY) This unit allows you to configure a multi-room audio system. You can control this unit from the second room using the supplied remote control. Only analog signals are sent to the second room. Any source you want to listen to in the second room must be connected using the analog (AUDIO L/R) input jacks on this unit. Zone 2 connections You need the following additional equipment to use the multi-room functions of this unit: • An infrared signal receiver in the second room. • An infrared emitter in the main room. This emitter transmits the infrared signals from the remote control in the second room to the main room (to a CD player, for example). • An amplifier and speakers for the second room. y • Since there are many possible ways to connect and use this unit in a multi-room installation, we recommend that you consult with the nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center for the Zone 2 connections which will best meet your requirements. • Some YAMAHA models are able to connect directly to the REMOTE CONTROL OUT jack of this unit. If you own these products, you may not need to use an infrared emitter. Up to 6 YAMAHA components can be connected as shown. OUT IN OUT IN REMOTE CONTROL OUT This unit • ■ System configuration and connections example ZONE 2 OUTPUT Amplifier DVD player (or other component) This unit Remote control DVD INPUT Infrared emitter Main room REMOTE CONTROL OUT Infrared signal receiver Second room ZONE 2 REMOTE IN Notes • When not using the main room, turn down the volume of this unit in the main room. Adjust the ZONE 2 volume using the amplifier in the second room. • To avoid unexpected noise, DO NOT USE the Zone 2 feature with CDs encoded in DTS. 64 00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 65 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM ZONE 2 (U.S.A., CANADA AND AUSTRALIA MODELS ONLY) Using this unit’s internal amplifier To use this unit’s internal amplifier, set “ZONE2 AMP” to ON in SET MENU (see page 59). R L + – PRESENCE/ ZONE 2 Second room This unit Remote controlling Zone 2 3 The supplied remote control can be used to control Zone 2. You can even select the input source and control components located in the main room directly from the second room regardless of the listening condition in the main room. ■ To enable Zone 2 mode on the remote control 1 ■ To control Zone 2 1 Press to set the remote control to Zone 2. The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control lights up while the remote control is in Zone 2 mode. 2 Press SYSTEM POWER to turn Zone 2 power on. 3 Press an input selector button to select the input source you want to listen to in the second room. . CD MD/CD-R TUNER SLEEP DVD DTV/CBL V-AUX MULTI CH IN VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 AMP Press CODE SET using a ballpoint pen or similar object. The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control flashes twice. CD MD/CD-R TUNER SLEEP DVD DTV/CBL V-AUX MULTI CH IN VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 ADVANCED OPERATION 2 Press Enter the code number “2999”. Immediately after you have configured the remote control for Zone 2, the remote will enter main mode. When the remote is in main mode, you can turn the main unit on, or set it in standby mode independently of Zone 2 by pressing SYSTEM POWER or STANDBY. AMP TRANSMIT CODE SET English 65 00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 66 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM ZONE 2 (U.S.A., CANADA AND AUSTRALIA MODELS ONLY) ■ Special considerations for DTS software 4 You can control Zone 2 using the input selector buttons, STANDBY, SYSTEM POWER and MUTE. CODE SET TRANSMIT The DTS signal is a digital bitstream. If you attempt to send the DTS signal to the second room you will only hear digital noise (that may damage your speakers). Thus, the following considerations and adjustments need to be made when playing DTS-encoded discs. SYSTEM STANDBY POWER MD/CD-R TUNER SLEEP V-AUX MULTI CH IN POWER POWER TV AV CD DVD DTV/CBL VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 TV VOL TV CH TV MUTE TV INPUT For DVDs encoded in DTS Only 2 channel analog audio signals may be sent to the second room. Use the disc menu to set the DVD player’s mixed 2channel left and right audio outputs to the PCM or Dolby Digital soundtrack. AMP VOLUME For CDs encoded in DTS To avoid unexpected noise, DO NOT USE the Zone 2 feature with CDs encoded in DTS. MUTE y Zone 2 volume cannot be adjusted with the remote control. Use the control on the amplifier in the second room. Note The remote control returns to main mode 10 seconds after you press , or if you press any button other than SYSTEM POWER, STANDBY, MUTE or the input selector buttons. If the TRANSMIT indicator is turned off, press to set the remote control to Zone 2 mode before turning Zone 2 power on or off, changing the input source, or muting the sound. ■ When you have finished using the unit To set both the main unit and Zone 2 to standby mode While holding down AMP, press STANDBY. y • You can turn on both the main unit and Zone 2 simultaneously by holding down AMP and pressing SYSTEM POWER. • SYSTEM POWER and STANDBY work differently depending on the selected mode. TRANSMIT indicator SYSTEM POWER/ STANDBY Main mode Off Turns the main unit on/standby Zone 2 mode On Turns Zone 2 to on/ standby 66 00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 67 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM EDITING SOUND FIELD PARAMETERS EDITING SOUND FIELD PARAMETERS What is a sound field What really creates the rich, full tones of a live instrument are the multiple reflections from the walls of the room. In addition to making the sound “live”, these reflections enable us to tell where the player is situated, and the size and shape of the room in which we are sitting. Changing parameter settings You can enjoy good quality sound with the factory preset parameters. Although you do not have to change the initial settings, you can change some of the parameters to better suit the input source or your listening room. MUTE ■ Elements of a sound field CODE SET TRANSMIT SYSTEM POWER In any environment, in addition to the direct sound coming straight to our ears from the player’s instrument, there are two distinct types of sound reflections that combine to make up the sound field: 1 POWER STANDBY POWER TV AV CD MD/CD-R TUNER SLEEP DVD DTV/CBL V-AUX MULTI CH IN STEREO HALL JAZZ 1 2 3 4 MUSIC ENTERTAIN TV THTR MOVIE 5 6 7 8 q/DTS NIGHT EX/ES STRAIGHT 9 0 10 VCR 1 AMP DVR/VCR2 PRESET/CH LEVEL TITLE Direct sound, early reflections and subsequent reverberation taken together help us to determine the subjective size and shape of the room, and it is this information that the digital sound field processor reproduces in order to create sound fields. SET MENU MENU A/B/C/D/E SELECT TV CH VOLUME 2 4,5 ON SCREEN TEST Reverberations These are caused by reflections from more than one surface — walls, ceiling, the back of the room — so numerous that they merge together to form a continuous sonic “afterglow”. They are non-directional, and lessen the clarity of the direct sound. 3 ENTER EFFECT TV VOL Early reflections Reflected sounds reach our ears extremely rapidly (50 ms – 100 ms after the direct sound), after reflecting from one surface only — for example, from the ceiling or a wall. Early reflections actually add clarity to the direct sound. ROCK RETURN DISPLAY REC TV MUTE AUDIO TV INPUT DISC SKIP 1 Press AMP. AMP 2 3 Turn on the video monitor and press ON SCREEN repeatedly to select the full display mode. ON SCREEN DISPLAY Select the sound field program you want to adjust. If you could create the appropriate early reflections and subsequent reverberations in your listening room, you would be able to create your own listening environment. The acoustics in your room could be changed to those of a concert hall, a dance floor, or virtually any size room at all. This ability to create sound fields at will is exactly what YAMAHA has done with the digital sound field processor. STEREO HALL JAZZ 1 2 3 ROCK 4 MUSIC ENTERTAIN TV THTR MOVIE 5 6 7 8 q/DTS NIGHT EX/ES STRAIGHT 9 0 10 ENTER EFFECT Program No. Program name ADDITIONAL INFORMATION P08 MOVIE THEATER Cursor .General DSPLEVEL;;;;0dB P.INIT.DLY;;15ms P.ROOMSIZE;;1.0 S.INIT.DLY;;20ms S.ROOMSIZE;;1.0 Parameters Parameter values English 67 00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 68 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM EDITING SOUND FIELD PARAMETERS 4 Press u / d to select the parameters. PRESET/CH SELECT 5 6 Press j / i to change the parameter value. When you set a parameter to a value other than the factory-set value, an asterisk mark (*) appears by the parameter name on the front panel display. PRESET/CH SELECT Repeat steps 3 through 5 as necessary to change other program parameters. Note You cannot change parameter values when “MEMORY GUARD” is set to ON. If you want to change the parameter values, set “MEMORY GUARD” to OFF (see page 59). Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is set in the standby mode, the power cord is disconnected from the AC outlet, or the power supply is temporarily cut due to power failure. However, if the power is cut for more than one week, the parameter values will return to the factory settings. If this happens, edit the parameter value again. ■ Resetting parameters to the factory presets To reset a certain parameter Select the parameter you want to reset, then press j / i repeatedly until the asterisk mark (*) next to the parameter name disappears. To reset all parameters Use PARAM. INI (see page 59). 68 00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 69 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS You can adjust the values of certain digital sound field parameters so the sound fields are recreated accurately in your listening room. Not all of the following parameters are found in every program. ■ DSP LEVEL Function: Description: Control range: This parameter adjusts the level of all the DSP effect sounds within a narrow range. Depending on the acoustics of your listening room, you may want to increase or decrease the DSP effect level relative to the level of the direct sound. –6 dB – +3 dB ■ INIT. DLY (Initial delay) Function: Description: Control range: This parameter changes the apparent distance from the source sound by adjusting the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection heard by the listener. The smaller the value, the closer the sound source seems to the listener. The larger the value, the farther it seems. For a small room, set to a small value. For a large room, set to a large value. 1 – 99 msec Source Sound Level Level Level Early Reflections Time Time Time INIT. DLY INIT. DLY INIT. DLY Sound Source Reflection Face Small value = 1 ms Large value = 99 ms ■ ROOM SIZE/P. ROOM SIZE (Room size) Function: Description: Control range: This parameter adjusts the apparent size of the surround sound field. The larger the value, the larger the surround sound field becomes. As the sound is repeatedly reflected around a room, the larger the hall is, the longer the time between the original reflected sound and the subsequent reflections. By controlling the time between the reflected sounds, you can change the apparent size of the virtual venue. Changing this parameter from one to two, doubles the apparent length of the room. 0.1 – 2.0 Time Level Level Time Early Reflections ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Level Source Sound Time Sound Source English Small value = 0.1 Large value = 2.0 69 00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 70 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS ■ LIVENESS Function: Description: Control range: This parameter adjusts the reflectivity of the virtual walls in the hall by changing the rate at which the early reflections decay. The early reflections of a sound source decay much faster in a room with acoustically absorbent wall surfaces than in one which has highly reflective surfaces. A room with acoustically absorbent surfaces is referred to as “dead”, while a room with highly reflective surfaces is referred to as “live”. The LIVENESS parameter lets you adjust the early reflection decay rate, and thus the “liveness” of the room. 0 – 10 Source Sound Time Small Reflected Sound Small value = 0 Level Dead Level Level Live Time Time Large Reflected Sound Large value = 10 ■ S. INIT. DLY (Surround initial delay) Function: This parameter adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection on the surround side of the sound field. You can only adjust this parameter when at least two front channels and two surround channels are used. Control Range: 1 – 49 msec ■ S. ROOM SIZE (Surround room size) Function: This parameter adjusts the apparent size of the surround sound field. Control Range: 0.1 – 2.0 ■ S. LIVENESS (Surround liveness) Function: This parameter adjusts the apparent reflectivity of the virtual walls in the surround sound field. Control Range: 0 – 10 ■ SB INIT. DLY (Surround back initial delay) Function: This parameter adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection in the surround back sound field. Control Range: 1 – 49 msec ■ SB ROOM SIZE (Surround back room size) Function: This parameter adjusts the apparent size of the surround back sound field. Control Range: 0.1 – 2.0 ■ SB LIVENESS (Surround back liveness) Function: This parameter adjusts the apparent reflectivity of the virtual wall in the surround back sound field. Control Range: 0 – 10 70 00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 71 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS ■ REV.TIME (Reverberation time) Function: This parameter adjusts the amount of time it takes for the dense, subsequent reverberation sound to decay by 60 dB (at 1 kHz). This changes the apparent size of the acoustic environment over an extremely wide range. Description: Set a longer reverberation time for “dead” sources and listening room environments, and a shorter time for “live” sources and listening room environments. Control Range: 1.0 – 5.0 sec Source Sound Reverberation Reverberation Early Reflections 60 dB 60 dB REV.TIME Sound Source REV.TIME 60 dB REV.TIME Long Reverberation Short Reverberation Large value = 5.0 s Small value = 1.0 s ■ REV.DELAY (Reverberation delay) This parameter adjusts the time difference between the beginning of the direct sound and the beginning of the reverberation sound. Description: The larger the value, the later the reverberation sound begins. A later reverberation sound makes you feel like you are in a larger acoustic environment. Control Range: 0 – 250 msec Level Function: Source Sound (dB) 60 dB Reverberation Time REV.DELAY REV.TIME ■ REV. LEVEL (Reverberation level) ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Function: This parameter adjusts the volume of the reverberation sound. Description: The larger the value, the stronger the reverberation becomes. Control Range: 0 – 100% Level Source Sound REV. LEVEL English Time 71 00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 72 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS ■ DIALG.LIFT (Dialog lift) Function: Description: Choices: This parameter adjusts the height of the front and center channel sounds by assigning some of the front and center channel elements to the presence speakers. The larger the parameter, the higher the position of the front and center channel sound. 0/1/2/3/4/5, initial setting is 3. For 7ch Stereo Function: These parameter adjusts the volume level for each channel in 7-channel stereo mode. Control Range: 0 – 100% ■ CT LEVEL (Center level) ■ SL LEVEL (Surround left level) ■ SR LEVEL (Surround right level) ■ SB LEVEL (Surround back level) ■ PR LEVEL (Presence level) For PRO LOGIC IIx Music and PRO LOGIC II Music ■ PANORAMA Function: Choices: Extends the front stereo image to include the surround speakers for wraparound effect. OFF/ON, initial setting is OFF. ■ DIMENSION Function: Control range: Gradually adjusts the sound field either towards the front or towards the rear. –3 (towards the rear) to +3 (towards the front), initial setting is STD (standard). ■ CT WIDTH (Center width) Function: Control range: Adjusts the center image from all three front speakers to varying degrees. A larger value adjusts the center image towards the front left and right speakers. 0 (center channel sound is output only from center speaker) to 7 (center channel sound is output only from front left and right speakers), initial setting is 3. For PRO LOGIC IIx Movie, Music and Game ■ PLII/PLIIx (Pro Logic II/Pro Logic IIx) Function: Choices: Switches the type of Pro Logic decoding to be used. PLII decoding creates 5.1-channel sound from 2channel sources. PLIIx decoding creates 6.1/7.1-channel sound from 2-channel sources. PLII, PLIIx For DTS Neo:6 Music ■ C. IMAGE (Center image) Function: Control range: 72 This parameter adjusts the center image from all three front speakers to varying degrees. 0 – 0.5 00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 73 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM TROUBLESHOOTING TROUBLESHOOTING Refer to the chart below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the instruction below does not help, set this unit to the standby mode, disconnect the power cord, and contact the nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center. ■ General Problem This unit fails to turn on when STANDBY/ ON (or SYSTEM POWER) is pressed, or enters in the standby mode soon after the power has been turned on. On-screen display does not appear. No sound Remedy Refer to page The power cord is not connected or the plug is not completely inserted. Connect the power cord firmly. — The impedance setting is incorrect. Set the impedance to match your speakers. 23 The protection circuitry has been activated. Make sure all speaker wire connections on this unit and on all speakers are secure and that the wire for each connection does not touch anything other than its respective connection. This unit has been exposed to a strong external electric shock (such as lightning and strong static electricity). Set this unit in the standby mode, disconnect the power cord, plug it back in after 30 seconds, then use it normally. — The setting for the on-screen display is set to “DISPLAY OFF”. Select the full display or short display mode. 48 “GRAY BACK” in SET MENU is set to OFF, and no video signal is currently being received. Set “GRAY BACK” to AUTO to always show the OSD. 58 Incorrect input or output cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. The optimizer microphone is connected. Disconnect the optimizer microphone. 25 The input mode is set to DTS or ANALOG. Select AUTO. 36 No appropriate input source has been selected. Select an appropriate input source with INPUT, MULTI CH INPUT or the input selector buttons. 30 Speaker connections are not secure. Secure the connections. 12 The front speakers to be used have not been selected properly. Select the front speakers with SPEAKERS A and/or B. 30 The volume is turned down. Turn up the volume. — The sound is muted. Press MUTE or any operation buttons of this unit to cancel a mute and adjust the volume. 31 The input mode is set to ANALOG while playing a source encoded with a DTS signal. Set the input mode to AUTO or DTS. 36 The signals this unit cannot reproduce are being received from a source component e.g.: a CD-ROM. Play a source whose signals this unit can reproduce. — The output and input for the picture are connected to different types of video jacks. Turn on the video conversion function. 58 12-14 16-19 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION No picture Cause English 73 00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 74 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM TROUBLESHOOTING Problem The sound suddenly goes off. Cause Remedy Refer to page Check that the impedance selector setting is correct. 23 Check that the speaker wires are not touching each other and then turn this unit back on. — The sleep timer has turned the unit off. Turn on the power, and play the source again. — The sound is muted. Press MUTE to cancel a mute. 31 Only the speaker on one side can be heard. Incorrect cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. 12 Incorrect balance settings in SET MENU. Adjust the SPEAKER LEVEL settings. 55 Only the center speaker outputs substantial sound. When playing a monaural source with a CINEMA DSP program, the source signal is directed to the center channel, and the front and surround speakers output effect sounds. No sound from the effect speakers. The sound field programs are turned off. Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) to turn them on. 36 You are using a source or program combination that does not output sound from all channels. Try another sound field program. 44 The output level of the center speaker is set to minimum. Raise the level of the center speaker. 55 “CENTER SP” in SET MENU is set to NONE. Select the appropriate setting for the center speaker. 53 One of the Hi-Fi DSP programs (except for 7ch Stereo) has been selected. Try another sound field program. 44 The output level of the surround speakers is set to minimum. Raise the output level of the surround speakers. 55 “SURR L/R SP” in SET MENU is set to NONE. Select the appropriate setting for the surround left and right speakers. 53 A monaural source is being played with STRAIGHT. Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) to turn on the sound fields. — Presence speakers are selected. Select surround back speakers in PR/SB SELECT. 57 “SURR L/R SP” in SET MENU is set to NONE. If the surround left and right speakers are set to NONE, the surround back speaker setting is automatically set to NONE. Select the appropriate setting for the surround speakers. 53 “SURR B L/R SP” in SET MENU is set to NONE. Select LRGx1 or SMLx1. 54 “LFE/BASS OUT” in SET MENU is set to FRNT when a Dolby Digital or DTS signal is being played. Select SWFR or BOTH. 54 “LFE/BASS OUT” in SET MENU is set to SWFR or FRNT when a 2-channel source is being played. Select BOTH. 54 No sound from the center speaker. No sound from the surround speakers. No sound from the surround back speakers. No sound from the subwoofer. The protection circuitry has been activated because of a short circuit, etc. The source does not contain low bass signals. 74 00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 75 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM TROUBLESHOOTING Problem Cause Remedy Refer to page Dolby Digital or DTS sources cannot be played. (Dolby Digital or DTS indicator on the front panel display does not light up.) The connected component is not set to output Dolby Digital or DTS digital signals. Make an appropriate setting following the operations instructions for your component. — The input mode is set to ANALOG. Set the input mode to AUTO or DTS. 36 A “humming” sound can be heard. Incorrect cable connections. Firmly connect the audio plugs. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. — The volume level cannot be increased, or the sound is distorted. The component connected to the OUT (REC) jacks of this unit is turned off. Turn on the power to the component. — The sound effect cannot be recorded. It is not possible to record the sound effect with a recording component. A source cannot be recorded by a digital recording component connected to this DIGITAL OUTPUT jack. The source component is not connected to this unit’s DIGITAL INPUT jacks. A source cannot be recorded by an analog component connected to the AUDIO OUT jacks. Connect the source component to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks. 16-19, 43 The source component is not connected to this unit’s analog AUDIO IN jacks. Connect the source component to the analog AUDIO IN jacks. 16-19, 43 The sound field parameters and some other settings on this unit cannot be changed. “MEMORY GUARD” in SET MENU is set to ON. Select OFF. 59 This unit does not operate properly. The internal microcomputer has been frozen by an external electric shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or by a power supply with low voltage. Disconnect the AC power cord from the outlet and then plug it in again after about 30 seconds. — “CHECK SP WIRES” appears in the front panel display. Speaker cables are short circuited. Make sure all speaker cables are connected correctly. 12 Some components cannot record the Dolby Digital or DTS sources. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION English 75 00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 76 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM TROUBLESHOOTING Problem Cause Remedy There is noise interference from digital or highfrequency equipment, or this unit. This unit is too close to the digital or highfrequency equipment. The picture is disturbed. The video source uses scrambled or encoded signals to prevent dubbing. This unit suddenly turns into the standby mode. The internal temperature becomes too high and the overheat protection circuitry has been activated. Refer to page Move this unit further away from such equipment. — Wait about 1 hour for this unit to cool down and then turn it back on. — ■ Tuner Problem FM stereo reception is noisy. FM AM 76 Cause Remedy Refer to page The characteristics of FM stereo broadcasts may cause this problem when the transmitter is too far away or the antenna input is poor. Check the antenna connections. Try using a high-quality directional FM antenna. 21 Use the manual tuning method. 39 There is distortion, and clear reception cannot be obtained even with a good FM antenna. There is multipath interference. Adjust the antenna position to eliminate multipath interference. — The desired station cannot be tuned in with the automatic tuning method. The signal is too weak. Use a high-quality directional FM antenna. 21 Use the manual tuning method. 39 Previously preset stations can no longer be tuned in. This unit has been disconnected for a long period. Preset the stations again. 39 The desired station cannot be tuned in with the automatic tuning method. The signal is weak or the antenna connections are loose. Tighten the AM loop antenna connections and orient it for best reception. — Use the manual tuning method. 39 There are continuous crackling and hissing noises. Noises result from lightning, fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats and other electrical equipment. Use an outdoor antenna and a ground wire. This will help somewhat, but it is difficult to eliminate all noise. — There are buzzing and whining noises. A TV set is being used nearby. Move this unit away from the TV. — 00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 77 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM TROUBLESHOOTING ■ Remote control Problem The remote control does not work nor function properly. Cause Remedy Refer to page Wrong distance or angle. The remote control will function within a maximum range of 6 m (20 ft) and no more than 30 degrees offaxis from the front panel. 7 Direct sunlight or lighting (from an inverter type of fluorescent lamp, etc.) is striking the remote control sensor of this unit. Reposition this unit. — The batteries are weak. Replace all batteries. 3 The manufacturer code was not correctly set. Set the manufacturer code correctly using the “LIST OF MANUFACTURER CODES” at the end of this manual. 61 Try to set another code for the same manufacturer using the “LIST OF MANUFACTURER CODES” at the end of this manual. 61 Even if the manufacturer code is correctly set, there are some models that do not respond to the remote control. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION English 77 00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 78 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM RESETTING THE FACTORY PRESETS RESETTING THE FACTORY PRESETS If you want to reset all of your unit’s parameters for any reason, do the following. This procedure completely resets ALL parameters, including the SET MENU, level, assign and tuner presets. Be sure this unit is in standby mode. (U.S.A. model) VOLUME OPTIMIZER MIC PRESET/TUNING FM/AM l PRESET/TUNING h A/B/C/D/E NEXT EDIT LEVEL PROGRAM MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO INPUT PHONES SPEAKERS A B STRAIGHT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE MULTI CH INPUT PURE DIRECT STANDBY /ON VIDEO AUX EFFECT SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO STANDBY/ON 1 VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL STRAIGHT (EFFECT) Hold down STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the front panel and press STANDBY/ON. “FACTORY PRESET” appears in the front panel display. y To cancel the initialization procedure without making any changes, press STANDBY/ON. 2 Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) to select the desired setting. Reset Cancel 3 78 To reset the unit to its factory presets. To cancel without making any changes. Press STANDBY/ON to confirm your selection. If you selected “Reset”, the unit is reset to its factory presets and switches to standby mode. If you selected “Cancel”, the unit switches to standby mode and nothing is reset. 00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 79 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM GLOSSARY GLOSSARY Audio formats ■ Dolby Digital Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives you completely independent multi-channel audio. With 3 front channels (left, center, and right), and 2 surround stereo channels, Dolby Digital provides 5 full-range audio channels. With an additional channel especially for bass effects, called LFE (low frequency effect), the system has a total of 5.1-channels (LFE is counted as 0.1 channel). By using 2-channel stereo for the surround speakers, more accurate moving sound effects and surround sound environment are possible than with Dolby Surround. The wide dynamic range (from maximum to minimum volume) reproduced by the 5 full-range channels and the precise sound orientation generated using digital sound processing provide listeners with previously unheard of excitement and realism. With this unit, any sound environment from monaural up to a 5.1-channel configuration can be freely selected for your enjoyment. ■ Dolby Digital Surround EX Dolby Digital EX creates 6 full-bandwidth output channels from 5.1-channel sources. This is done using a matrix decoder that derives 3 surround channels from the 2 in the original recording. For the best results, Dolby Digital EX should be used with movie sound tracks recorded with Dolby Digital Surround EX. With this additional channel, you can experience more dynamic and realistic moving sound especially with scenes with “flyover” and “fly-around” effects. ■ Dolby Pro Logic II ■ Dolby Pro Logic IIx Dolby Pro Logic IIx is a new technology enabling discrete multi-channel playback from 2-channel or multi-channel sources. There is a Music mode for music, a Movie mode for movies and a Game mode for games. Dolby Surround uses a 4 channel analog recording system to reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects: 2 front left and right channels (stereo), a center channel for dialog (monaural), and a surround channel for special sound effects (monaural). The surround channel reproduces sound within a narrow frequency range. Dolby Surround is widely used with nearly all video tapes and laser discs, and in many TV and cable broadcasts as well. The Dolby Pro Logic decoder built into this unit employs a digital signal processing system that automatically stabilizes the volume on each channel to enhance moving sound effects and directionality. ■ DTS 96/24 DTS 96/24 offers an unprecedented level of audio quality for multi-channel sound on DVD-Video, and is fully backward-compatible with all DTS decoders. “96” refers to a 96 kHz sampling rate (compared to the typical 48 kHz sampling rate). “24” refers to 24-bit word length. DTS 96/ 24 offers sound quality transparent to the original 96/24 master, and 96/24 5.1-channel sound with full-quality fullmotion video for music programs and motion picture soundtracks on DVD-video. ■ DTS (Digital Theater Systems) Digital Surround DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog soundtracks of movies with a 6-channel digital sound track, and is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie theaters around the world. Digital Theater Systems Inc. has developed a home theater system so that you can enjoy the depth of sound and natural spatial representation of DTS digital surround in your home. This system produces practically distortion-free 6-channel sound (technically, a left, right and center channels, 2 surround channels, plus an LFE 0.1 channel as a subwoofer, for a total of 5.1channels). The unit incorporates DTS-ES decoder that enables 6.1- channel reproduction by adding the surround back channel to existing 5.1-channel format. ■ Neo:6 Neo:6 decodes the conventional 2-channel sources for 6 channel playback by the specific decoder. It enables playback with the full-range channels with higher separation just like digital discrete signal playback. Two modes are available; “Music mode” for playing music sources and “Cinema mode” for movies. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Dolby Pro Logic II is an improved technique used to decode vast numbers of existing Dolby Surround software. This new technology enables a discrete 5-channel playback with 2 front left and right channels, 1 center channel, and 2 surround left and right channels (instead of only 1 surround channel for conventional Pro Logic technology). Music and Game modes are also available for 2-channel sources in addition to the Movie mode. ■ Dolby Surround English 79 00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 80 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM GLOSSARY Sound field programs Audio information ■ CINEMA DSP ■ ITU-R Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect is best felt in a theater having many speakers and designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions, such as room size, wall material, number of speakers, and so on, can differ so widely, it’s inevitable that there are differences in the sound heard as well. Based on a wealth of actually measured data, YAMAHA CINEMA DSP uses YAMAHA original sound field technology to combine Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital and DTS systems to provide the visual and audio experience of movie theater in the listening room of your own home. ITU-R is the radio communication sector of the ITU (International Telecommunication Union). ITU-R recommends a standard speaker placement which is used in many critical listening rooms, especially for mastering purposes. ■ SILENT CINEMA YAMAHA has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for headphones have been set for each sound field so that accurate representations of all the sound field programs can be enjoyed on headphones. ■ Virtual CINEMA DSP YAMAHA has developed a Virtual CINEMA DSP algorithm that allows you to enjoy DSP sound field surround effects even without any surround speakers by using virtual surround speakers. It is even possible to enjoy Virtual CINEMA DSP using a minimal two-speaker system that does not include a center speaker. 80 ■ LFE 0.1 channel This channel is for the reproduction of low bass signals. The frequency range for this channel is 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This channel is counted as 0.1 because it only enforces a low frequency range compared to the full-range reproduced by the other 5/6 channels in Dolby Digital or DTS 5.1/6.1-channel systems. ■ PCM (Linear PCM) Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized, recorded and transmitted without using any compression. This is used as a method of recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM system uses a technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per very small unit of time. Standing for “pulse code modulation”, the analog signal is encoded as pulses and then modulated for recording. ■ Sampling frequency and number of quantized bits When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of times the signal is sampled per second is called the sampling frequency, while the degree of fineness when converting the sound level into a numeric value is called the number of quantized bits. The range of rates that can be played back is determined based on the sampling rate, while the dynamic range representing the sound level difference is determined by the number of quantized bits. In principle, the higher the sampling frequency, the wider the range of frequencies that can be played back, and the higher the number of quantized bits, the more finely the sound level can be reproduced. 00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 81 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM GLOSSARY Video signal information ■ Component video signal With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated into the Y signal for the luminance and the PB and PR signals for the chrominance. Color can be reproduced more faithfully with this system because each of these signals is independent. The component signal is also called the “color difference signal” because the luminance signal is subtracted from the color signal. A monitor with component input jacks is required in order to use the component signal for output. ■ Composite video signal With the composite video signal system, the video signal is composed of three basic elements of a video picture; color, brightness and synchronization data. A composite video jack on a video component transmits these three elements combined. ■ S-Video signal With the S-Video signal system, the video signal normally transmitted using a pin cable is separated and transmitted as the Y signal for the luminance and the C signal for the chrominance through the S-Video cable. Using the S VIDEO jack eliminates video signal transmission loss and allows recording and playback of even more beautiful images. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION English 81 00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page 82 Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM SPECIFICATIONS SPECIFICATIONS AUDIO SECTION VIDEO SECTION • Minimum RMS Output Power for Front, Center, Surround, Surround back 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 Ω ...................................... 95 W • Video Signal Type .......................................................... PAL/NTSC • Maximum Power (EIAJ) [China, Korea and General models] 1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 Ω ........................................................ 135 W • Dynamic Power (IHF) 8/6/4/2 Ω ........................................................... 130/165/195/240 W • DIN Standard Output Power [U.K., Europe and Asia models] 1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 4 Ω ....................................................... 145 W • IEC Output Power [U.K., Europe and Asia models] 1 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 Ω ..................................................... 105 W • Signal to Noise Ratio .............................................................. 50 dB • Frequency Response (MONITOR OUT) Composite, S-Video ................................. 5 Hz to 10 MHz, –3 dB Component .............................................. 5 Hz to 60 MHz, –3 dB FM SECTION • Tuning Range [U.S.A. and Canada models] .......................... 87.5 to 107.9 MHz [Asia and General model] ......... 87.5/87.50 to 108.0/108.00 MHz [Other models] ............................................ 87.50 to 108.00 MHz • Usable Sensitivity (IHF) ...................................... 1.0 µV (11.2 dBf) • Damping Factor (IHF) 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 Ω ..................................................100 or more • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF) Mono/Stereo ............................................................. 76 dB/70 dB • Frequency Response CD terminal to Front L/R ...................... 10 Hz to 100 kHz, –3 dB • Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz) Mono/Stereo ................................................................ 0.2%/0.3% • Total Harmonic Distortion CD, etc. to Front L/R (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 50 W, 8 Ω) .......... 0.06% • Stereo Separation (1 kHz) ....................................................... 42 dB • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network) CD (250 mV) to Front L/R, Effect Off ...............................100 dB • Residual Noise (IHF-A Network) Front L/R ................................................................ 150 µV or less • Channel Separation (1 kHz/10 kHz) CD (5.1 kΩ terminated) to Front L/R ....................... 60 dB/45 dB • Tone Control (Front L/R) BASS Boost/Cut ........................................................ ±6 dB/50 Hz BASS Turnover Frequency .................................................350 Hz TREBLE Boost/Cut ................................................ ±6 dB/20 kHz TREBLE Turnover Frequency ...........................................3.5 kHz • Phones Output .......................................................... 150 mV/100 Ω • Input Sensitivity/Input Impedance CD, etc. ................................................................. 200 mV/47 kΩ MULTI CH INPUT ............................................... 200 mV/47 kΩ • Output Level/Output Impedance REC OUT ............................................................. 200 mV/1.2 kΩ PRE OUT ..................................................................... 2 V/1.2 kΩ SUB WOOFER ........................................................... 4 V/1.7 kΩ ZONE 2 OUTPUT [U.S.A., Canada and Australia models] ............ 200 mV/1.2 kΩ • Frequency Response ......................... 20 Hz to 15 kHz, +0.5, –2 dB AM SECTION • Tuning Range [U.S.A. and Canada models] .............................. 530 to 1710 kHz [Asia and General models] ................. 530/531 to 1710/1611 kHz [Other models] .................................................... 531 to 1611 kHz • Usable Sensitivity ............................................................. 300 µV/m GENERAL • Power Supply [U.S.A. and Canada models] ............................. AC 120 V, 60 Hz [Australia model] ............................................... AC 240 V, 50 Hz [China model] .................................................... AC 220 V, 50 Hz [Korea model] .................................................... AC 220 V, 60 Hz [U.K. and Europe models] ................................. AC 230 V, 50 Hz [General model] ................ AC 110/120/220/230-240 V, 50/60 Hz [Asia model] ................................... AC 220/230-240 V, 50/60 Hz • Power Consumption [U.S.A. and Canada models] ................................. 400 W/500 VA [Other models] .................................................................... 440 W • Standby Power Consumption ................................................. 0.1 W • AC Outlets [U.S.A., Europe and Canada models].. 2 (Total 100 W maximum) [U.K. and Australia models] ............... 1 (Total 100 W maximum) [Asia, China and General models] ........ 2 (Total 50 W maximum) • Dimension (W x H x D) .................................. 435 x 171 x 420 mm (17-1/8” x 6-3/4” x 16-1/2”) • Weight .............................................................. 12.5 kg (27 lbs 9 oz) 82 00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page i Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM LIST OF MANUFACTURER CODES TV A TANDY 0941 ABEX 1151 ADMIRA 1141 ADVENTURA 1131 AIKO 1121 AIWA 1481 AKAI 0331, 1101, 1111 ALBA 0431 ALLERON 1091 AMBASSADOR 1081 AMSTRAD 0481, 1081 ANAM 0251, 1041, 1051, 1061, 1071 ANAM NATIONAL 1041 AOC 0361, 1021, 1031, 1111, 1161 ARCHER 1161 AUDIOSONIC 1001 AUDIOVOX 1051, 1161 BAUER 0441 BAUR 1001 BEIJING 1511, 1551, 1561 BELCOR 1031 BELL & HOWELL 0981, 0991 BEON 1001 BRADFORD 1051 BROCKWOOD 1031 BROKSONIC 1161 BUSH 1001 CANDLE 0351, 0361, 0961, 0971, 1111, 1131 CAPEHART 1021 CARVER 0101 CATHAY 1001 CELEBRITY 0951 CENTURION 0411 CHANGHONG 1541, 1551, 1561, 1621 CITIZEN 0351, 0361, 0921, 0931, 0941, 0961, 0971, 1111, 1121, 1131 CLAIRTONE 1011 CLARIVOX 1001 CONCERTO 0351, 0971 CONROWA 1751 CONTEC 0901, 0911, 1011, 1051 CORANDO 0941 CRAIG 0251, 1051 CROWN 0941, 1051 CURTIS MATHES 0161, 0361, 0931, 0941, 0981, 1111 CXC 1051 DAEWOO 0291, 0301, 0331, 0721, 0941, 1001, 1031, 1121, 1191, 1531, 1581, 1591, 1601 DANSAI 1001 DAYTRON 0941, 1031 DECCA 0271, 1001 DIXI 0331, 1001, 1071 DUMONT 0891, 1031 DYNATECH 0881 ELECTROBAND 0951, 1011 ELECTROHOME 0941 ELECTRON 0941 ELIN 1001 ELTA 0331 EMERSON 0001, 0021, 0061, 0071, 0081, 0091, 0111, 0811, 0821, 0831, 0841, 0851, 0861, 0871, 0901, 0921, 0941, 0981, 1011, 1031, 1051, 1081, 1091 ENVISION 0361, 1111 ERRES 1001 ETRON 0331 FERGUSON 1001 FINLUX 1001 FISHER 0171, 0801, 0981 FORMENTI 0441 FORMONTI 1001 FORTRESS 1141 FUJITSU 1091 FUNAI 1051, 1091, 1501, 1521 FUTURETECH 1051 GE 0131, 0161, 0201, 0751, 0761, 0771, 0781, 0791, 0811, 0861, 1041 GEC 0271, 1001 GEMINI 0391 GENEXXA 0431 GIBRALTER 0891, 1031, 1111 GOODMANS/TASHIKO 0271, 0661, 1001 GRANADA 1001 GRUNDIG 1781, 1791, 1801, 1811, 1821, 1831, 1841, 1851, 1861, 1871, 1881 GUNPY 1051, 1091 HARMAN/KARDON 0721 HALLMARK 0861 HANSEATIC 1001 HARVARD 1051, 1061 HINARI 1001, 1091 HITACHI 0181, 0351, 0671, 0681, 0691, 0701, 0711, 0871, 0941, 0971, 1351 HYPSON 1001 IMA 1051 INDIANA 1001 INFINITY REFERENCE 0101 INTERFUNK 1001 ITT 0611 JANEIL 1131 JBL JCB JENSEN JINXING 0101 0951 0311 1531, 1541, 1551, 1561, 1571, 1621, 1631, 1641, 1651, 1691, 1731 JVC (VICTOR) 0261, 0281, 0641, 0651, 0661, 0841 KAWASHO 0901 KAYPANI 1021 KENWOOD 0361, 1031, 1111 KLOSS 0631, 0721, 1131 KTV 0921, 0941, 1011, 1051, 1111 LEYCO 1001 LG (GOLDSTAR) 0031, 0121, 0351, 0411, 0731, 0741, 0861, 0941, 0971, 1001, 1031, 1111, 1151 LIESENK & TTER 1001 LLOYTRON 0941 LOEWE 1001 LOGIK 0991, 1771 LUXMAN 0351, 0971 LXI 0101, 0621, 0761, 0861, 0981 MAGNAVOX 0101, 0341, 0391, 0401, 0411, 0421, 0581, 0591, 0601, 0611, 0631, 0661, 0961, 1111 MAJESTIC 0991 MARANTZ 0101, 0221, 0361, 1001, 1111 MARK 1001 MATSUI 0271, 0331, 1001 MEDIATOR 1001 MEGATRON 0691, 0861, 1161 MEI 1011 M-ELECTRONIC 1001 MEMOREX 0331, 0571, 0861, 0971, 0981, 0991, 1771 METZ 1791, 1831, 1891, 1901, 1911, 1921, 1931, 1941 MGA 0361, 0561, 0571, 0861, 1031, 1111 MIDLAND 0751, 0761, 0891, 0941, 1151 MITSUBISHI 0221, 0321, 0561, 0571, 0661, 0861, 1031, 1101, 1381 MONTGOMERY 1091 MOTOROLA 1041, 1141 MTC 0351, 0361, 0881, 0931, 0971, 1011, 1031, 1111 MULTITECH 0881, 1051 NAD 0551, 0621, 0861 NEC 0241, 0351, 0361, 0661, 0971, 1031, 1111, 1321, 1711 NECKERMANN 1001 NEI 1001 NIKKAI 0271, 0431, 1001, 1151 NIKKO 0861, 1111, 1121 NOVABEAM 0721 NTC 1121 ONWA 1051 OPTIMUS 0551 OPTONICA 0541, 1141 ORION 0831, 1001 OSAKI 0271, 1151 OTTO VERSAND 1001 PANASONIC 0101, 0191, 0251, 0751, 1041, 1311, 1371, 1431 PANDA 1541, 1721 PENNY 0161, 0361, 0521, 0531, 0621, 0731, 0751, 0761, 0781, 0791, 0861, 0931, 0941, 1031, 1041, 1111, 1151, 1161 PEONY 1561, 1621 PHILCO 0361, 0581, 0591, 0601, 0611, 0631, 0961, 1031, 1111 PHILIPS 0101, 0401, 1001 PHONOLA 1001 PILOT 0941, 1031, 1111 PIONEER 0511, 0551, 0871 PORTLAND 0941, 1031, 1121 PRICECLUB 0931 PRISM 0751 PROSCAN 0761 PROTECH 1001 PROTON 0501, 0861, 0941, 1021, 1161 PULSAR 0891 PULSER 1031 QUASAR 0251, 0751, 1041 QUELLE 1001 RADIO SHACK 0541, 0941, 1031, 1051, 1151 RADIOLA 1001 RCA 0051, 0141, 0151, 0181, 0411, 0491, 0531, 0761, 0771, 0871, 1031 REALISTIC 0541, 0861, 0941, 0971, 0981, 1031, 1051, 1111, 1151 RHAPSODY 1011 R-LINE 1001 RUNCO 0891, 1111 SAISHO 0331, 1081 SAMPO 0361, 0941, 1021, 1111, 1151 SAMSUNG 0331, 0341, 0351, 0361, 0861, 0931, 0941, 0971, 1001, 1031, 1111, 1151 SAMSUX 0941 i 00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page ii Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM SANYO 0171, 0231, 0271, 0661, 0801, 0911, 0981, 1231, 1251, 1261 SBR 1001 SCHEIDER 1001 SCIMITSU 1031 SCOTCH 0861 SCOTT 0831, 0861, 0941, 1031, 1051, 1091 SEARS 0101, 0161, 0171, 0351, 0481, 0521, 0621, 0761, 0801, 0861, 0971, 0981, 1091 SHANGHAI 1561, 1681 SHARP 0461, 0471, 0541, 0661, 0911, 0941, 1141 SHOGUN 1031 SIGNATURE 0991, 1771 SIMPSON 0581, 0961 SOLAVOX 1151 SONOKO 1001 SONTEC 1001 SONY 0371, 0451, 0661, 0841, 0951, 1281, 1441 SOUNDESIGN 0861, 0961, 1051, 1091 SOUNDWAVE 1001 SPECTRICON 1161 SQUAREVIEW 0481 SSS 1031, 1051 STAR-LITE 1051 SUPREM 0951 SUPRE-MACY 1131 SURPA 0351, 0971 SYLVANIA 0101, 0361, 0441, 0581, 0591, 0601, 0611, 0631, 0961, 1111 SYMPHONIC 0481 SYSLINE 1001 TANDY 0271, 0431, 1141 TATUNG 0271, 0881, 1001, 1041, 1161 TCL 1561, 1631, 1701 TECHNICS 0751 TECHWOOD 0351, 0751, 0971 TEKNIKA 0101, 0351, 0571, 0931, 0941, 0961, 0971, 0991, 1031, 1051, 1091, 1121, 1131, 1771 TELETECH 0331 TERA 0501 THAKRAL 1671 THORM 1001 TMK 0351, 0861, 0971, 1081 TOSHIBA 0381, 0521, 0621, 0661, 0931, 0981, 1301 TOSONIC 1011 TOTEVISION 0941 TRICAL 0911 UNIVERSAL 0781, 0791 UNIVERSUM 1001 ii VECTOR RESEARCH 0361, 1111 VESTEL 1001 VIDEO CONCEPT 1101 VIDIKRON 0101, 0211 VIDTECH 0861, 1031 VIKING 1131 WARDS 0101, 0361, 0451, 0541, 0581, 0591, 0601, 0611, 0771, 0781, 0791, 0861, 0971, 0991, 1031, 1091, 1111, 1771 WATSON 1001 XOGEGO 1611, 1621, 1661, 1741, 1761 YAMAHA 0361, 1031, 1111 YOKO 1001 ZENITH 0011, 0041, 0891, 0991, 1771 ZONDA 1161 CABLE TV ABC 0256, 0376 ANTRONIX 0136 ARCHER 0136, 0286 BBT 0076 CABLETIME 0166 CABLEVISION 0196 COLOUR VOICE 0306, 0346 COMTRONICS 0216, 0276 EAGLE COMTRONICS 0276 EASTERN 0066 ELECTRICORD 0206 ELECTUS 0266 GE 0116, 0126 GEC CABLE SYSTEM 0196 HAMLIN H5 0676 HAMLIN H6 0666 HAMLIN H6S 0656 HAMLIN H8 0646 HAMLIN H9 0636 JERROLD 0256 JERROLD 400L 0626 JERROLD 450L 0616 JERROLD 550 0606 JERROLD OSD CATV 0596 JERROLD SPRUCER 0436 MAGNAVOX/PHILIPS 0416, 0426 MAMM 0296 MEMOREX 0386 MOVIE TIME 0146, 0206 NORTHCOAST 0016 NSC 0146 OAK 0106 OAK SIGMA 450 0546 OAK SIGMA 550 0536 PANASONIC TZ 120/130 0476 PANASONIC TZ 170/180 0446 PANASONIC TZ140 0466 PANASONIC TZ150/160 0456 PARAGON PHILIPS 0386 0036, 0216, 0306, 0316, 0326, 0336, 0346 PIONEER 0006, 0086 PIONEER BR50 0846 PIONEER BR60/70/80/81/82 0696 PIONEER BR90 0556 PULSAR 0386 RCA DIGITAL SATELLITE SYSTEM 0396, 0406 REALISTIC 0136 REGENCY/EASTERN0686 RUNCO 0386 SAMSUNG 0276 SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA 175/475 0576 SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA 75 0366, 0586 SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA 8650 0566 SIGNAL 0276 SL MARX 0276 SPECTAVISION 0236 STANDARD COMPONENTS 0186 STARCOM V 0256 STARGATE 0276 SYLVANIA/TEXSCAN 0376, 0496 TEKNIKA 0176 TELESERVICE 0056 TELEVIEW 0276 TEXSCAN 0186, 0376 TFC 0026 TOCOM 0226, 0356 TOCOM 5503A 0526 TOCOM 5503VIP/5507 0516 TOCOM TC56 0506 TOSHIBA 0386 TUDI 0046 UNIKA 0136 UNIVERSAL 0136, 0156, 0206, 0286 VIDEOWAY 0096 VIEWSTAR 0216 ZENITH 0246, 0386, 0486 SATELLITE TUNER ALPHA STAR 0826 CHAPARRAL 0756 ECHOSTAR 0836 GENERAL INSTRUMENT 0776, 0876 HTS 0836 HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEMS 0816 JERROLD 0776, 0786 PANASONIC 0806 PRIMESTAR 0776, 0786 RCA 0766 SONY 0796 (DBS) HITACHI 0856 MAGNAVOX 0886 MEMOREX 0886 PANASONIC 0896 PHILIPS 0886 SONY 0906 STAR CHOICE 0876 TOSHIBA 0866, 0916 UNIDEN 0886 VCR A TANDY ADVENTURA AIKO AIWA AKAI 0902 0992 0982 0992 0262, 0942, 0952, 0962, 0972 AMERICAN HIGH 0932 AMSTRAD 0992 ASA 0002, 0912 ASHA 0922 AUDIO DYNAMICS 0202 AUDIOVOX 0912 BEAUMARK 0922 BELL & HOWELL 0902 BLAUPUNKT 0412 BROKSONIC 0872, 0882, 0892 BUSH 0852 CALIX 0912 CANON 0862, 0932 CCE 0852, 0982 CITIZEN 0912, 0982 COLT 0852 CRAIG 0832, 0842, 0852, 0912, 0922 CURTIS MATHES 0662, 0822, 0932 CYBERNEX 0922 DAEWOO 0802, 0812, 0982 DBX 0202 DYNATECH 0472, 0992 ELECTROHOME 0912 ELECTROPHONIC 0912 EMEREX 0792 EMERSON 0072, 0132, 0142, 0152, 0162, 0172, 0182, 0192, 0212, 0702, 0712, 0722, 0732, 0742, 0752, 0762, 0772, 0782, 0872, 0882, 0892, 0912, 0952, 0992, 1072 FINLUX 0002, 0992 FISHER 0682, 0692, 0842, 0902 FUJI 0672, 0932 FUNAI 0992 GARRARD 0992 GE 0662, 0822, 0932 GO VIDEO 0642, 0652 GOODMANS 0402 GRADIENTE 0992 GRANDA 0612, 0902 GRUNDIG 0002 HARLEY DAVIDSON 0992 00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page iii Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM HARMAN/KARDON 0632, 1082 HARWOOD 0752, 0852 HEADQUARTER 0612 HI-Q 0842 HINARI 0852 HITACHI 0102, 0562, 0572, 0582, 0592, 0602, 0992 ITT 0942 JVC (VICTOR) 0202, 0522, 0532, 0542, 0552 KENWOOD 0202, 0542, 0612, 0632, 0902 KLH 0852 KODAK 0912, 0932 LG (GOLDSTAR) 0082, 0632, 0912 LLOYD 0992 LOGIK 0852 LUXOR 0942 LXI 0022, 0912 MAGNAVOX 0002, 0482, 0492, 0502, 0512, 0932 MAGNIN 0922 MARANTZ 0002, 0202, 0402, 0632, 0932 MARTA 0912 MATSUSHITA 0932 MATSUI 0722 MEI 0222, 0932 MEMOREX 0232, 0242, 0472, 0512, 0612, 0842, 0902, 0912, 0922, 0932, 0992 MGA 0762, 0952 MGA TECHNOLOGY 0922 MINOLTA 0592, 0602 MITSUBISHI 0452, 0462, 0542, 0762, 0952, 1082 MOTOROLA 0472, 0932 MTC 0922, 0992 MULTITECH 0852, 0992 NAD 0442 NEC 0122, 0202, 0292, 0422, 0432, 0542, 0632 NIKKO 0912 NOBLEX 0922 OLYMPUS 0412, 0932 OPTIMUS 0442, 0472, 0912 OPTONICA 0402 ORION 0212, 0722, 0742, 0772 OSAKI 0912 PANASONIC 0012, 0052, 0092, 0222, 0372, 0382, 0392, 0412, 0932 PENNY 0202, 0432, 0602, 0632, 0692, 0912, 0922, 0932 PENTAX 0592, 0602 PERDIO 0992 PHILCO 0002, 0932 PHILIPS 0002, 0282, 0402, 0492, 0932 PILOT 0912 PIONEER 0442, 0542 PROSCAN 1002, 1012, 1022, 1032, 1042, 1052, 1062 PULSAR 0512 QUARTER 0612 QUARTZ 0272, 0612 QUASAR 0382, 0392, 0932 RADIO SHACK 0912, 0992 RADIX 0912 RANDEX 0912 RCA 0112, 0382, 0392, 0482, 0592, 0602, 0662, 0822, 0942 REALISTIC 0402, 0472, 0612, 0682, 0842, 0902, 0912, 0922, 0932, 0992 RICOH 0352, 0362 SAISHO 0212, 0582, 0722, 0732, 0742, 0772 SALORA 0612, 0762 SAMSUNG 0212, 0312, 0922, 0962 SANKY 0472, 0512 SANSUI 0292, 0542, 0832 SANYO 0242, 0612, 0842, 0902, 0922 SBR 0002, 0282 SCHEIDER 0852 SCOTT 0342, 0712, 0762, 0872, 0882, 0892 SEARS 0302, 0592, 0602, 0612, 0682, 0692, 0842, 0902, 0912, 0932 SHARP 0402, 0472 SHINTOM 0852 SHOGUN 0922 SINGER 0852 SONY 0032, 0332, 0352, 0362, 0672, 0792, 0932 STS 0602 SUNPAK 0352 SYLVANIA 0002, 0492, 0502, 0762, 0932, 0992 SYMPHONIC 0992 TANDY 0992 TASHIKO 0712, 0992 TEAC 0992 TECHNICS 0932 TEKNIKA 0322, 0912, 0932, 0992 TELEFUNKEN 0252 TMK 0212, 0732, 0772, 0922 TOSHIBA 0062, 0302, 0342, 0622, 0682, 0712, 0762 TOTEVISION 0912, 0922 UNITECH 0922 VECTOR RESEARCH 0202, 0432, 0632 VIDEO CONCEPTS 0202, 0432, 0632, 0952 WARDS 0322, 0402, 0472, 0482, 0602, 0712, 0842, 0852, 0922, 0932, 0992 YAMAHA ZENITH 0202, 0632 0042, 0362, 0512, 0672 DVD PLAYER AKAI 0058 AIWA 0218 DENON 0188 HITACHI 0198 JVC (VICTOR) 0088, 0178 KENWOOD 0148 LG (GOLDSTAR) 0228 MAGNAVOX 0128 MITSUBISHI 0138 ONKYO 0068, 0128 PANASONIC 0028 PHILIPS 0098, 0128 PIONEER 0108, 0118 PROSCAN 0158 RCA 0158 SAMSUNG 0078 SHARP 0038 SONY 0018 TECHNICS 0028 THOMSON 0168 TOSHIBA 0048, 0128 YAMAHA 0008, 0028, 0098 ZENITH 0128 DVD RECORDER PANASONIC PHILIPS PIONEER TOSHIBA YAMAHA 0238, 0248, 0258 0208 0278, 0288, 0298 0268 0208 LD PLAYER AIWA 0157 DENON 0147 DISCO VISION0017 FUNAI 0157 HITACHI (E) 0017 KENWOOD 0087, 0107 MAGNAVOX 0027 MARANTZ 0027 MITSUBISHI 0137 NAD 0137 PANASONIC 0077, 0177 PHILIPS 0027 PIONEER 0017, 0037, 0137 RCA 0167 REALISTIC 0157 SHARP 0127 SONY 0047, 0057, 0117 VICTOR 0097 YAMAHA 0007, 0067 CD PLAYER ACOUSTIC RESEARCH 1295 ADC 0025, 0065 ADCOM 0205, 0255, 1015 ADS 0265 AIWA 0295, 0945, 1035, 1055 AKAI 0175, 0485, 0535 ALPINE 1215, 1305 AUDIO-TECHNICA 0545 BSR 0245, 0655, 0775 CALIFORNIA AUDIO LAB 0055 CAPETRONIC 1205 CARRERA 0245 CARVER 0285, 1135 CASIO 0345 CROWN 0185 CURTIS MATHES 0345 DENON 0275, 0875, 0885 DEUAL (E) 0505 DYNAMIC BASS (H) 0555 EMERSON 0205, 0325, 1105 EROICA 1275 FISHER 0095, 0555, 0925, 1005 GARRARD 0365 GENEXXA 0305, 0325, 1105 HARMAN/KARDON 0105, 0175, 0465, 0995 HITACHI 0195, 0205, 0505, 0815 INKEL 0115, 0395 JVC (VICTOR) 0315 KENWOOD 0045, 0095, 0405, 0585, 0725, 0735, 0745, 0755, 0895 KYOCERA 0025 LG (GOLDSTAR) 1135, 1225, 1265, 1335 LUXMAN 0075, 0425, 0675, 0705, 0715, 0985 MAGNAVOX 0165, 0215, 0645, 0955 MARANTZ 0215, 0235, 0375, 0785, 1345 MCINTOSH 0355, 1085 MCS 0905, 1315 MEMOREX 0205, 0225, 0235, 0305, 0325, 1105 MGA 0135 MISSION 0215 MITSUBISHI 0135, 0445 MTC 1255 NAD 0035, 0615, 0685, 0695 NAKAMICHI 0125, 0435, 0515 NEC 0255, 0905, 0965 NIKKO 0545, 1005 ONKYO 0155, 0455, 0495, 0805, 1155 OPTIMUS 0225, 0245, 0555, 0595, 0845, 0855, 0865, 0895, 0935 PANASONIC 0055, 0825, 1095, 1125 PENNY 0905 PHILIPS 0165, 0215 PIONEER 0305, 0935, 1045 PROTON 0215, 1185 QUASAR 0055 RCA 0205, 0915, 1115 REALISTIC 0205, 0225, 0235, 0325, 0555, 0845 REVOX 1175 ROTEL 0215 SABA TELECOMMANDER (E) 0505 iii 00_RXV650_U_EN.book Page iv Tuesday, February 17, 2004 9:44 AM SAE SAMSUNG SANSUI 0215 1285 0215, 0625, 0975, 1025, 1105 SANYO 0145, 0555, 0635, 0765 SCOTT 0325, 1105 SEARS 0345 SHARP 0235, 0665, 0895, 1065, 1075 SHERWOOD 0115, 0235, 0395, 0475 SIEMENTS GARRARD 1245 SIGNATURE 0175 SONTEC 1165 SONY 0065, 0565, 0865, 1145 STARON 1235 STS 0025 SYLVANIA 0215 SYMPHONIC 0335 TANDY 0305 TANGBERG 1195 TEAC 0235, 0335, 0385, 0525, 0795, 0835, 1355 TECHNICS 0055, 0605, 1095 TECHWOOD 1325 TELEFUNKEN (E) 0505 THOMSON (E) 0505 TOSHIBA 0035, 0685 VECTOR RESEARCH 0065, 1135 WARDS 0175 YAMAHA 0005, 0015, 0085, 0415, 0545, 0575, 1065 CD RECORDER HITACHI JVC (VICTOR) MARANTZ PHILIPS PIONEER YAMAHA 0474 0504 0484, 0494 0444 0454, 0464 0414 MD RECORDER KENWOOD PIONEER SHARP SONY YAMAHA 0384 0424 0434 0394 0024, 0394, 0404, 0514 TAPE DECK AIWA AKAI CARVER DENON FISHER GARRARD JVC (VICTOR) KENWOOD MAGNAVOX MARANTZ MITSUBISHI iv 0094, 0214, 0224 0184 0094 0304 0144 0194, 0204 0274, 0284, 0294 0124, 0134, 0154, 0234, 0244, 0264 0094 0094, 0344 0184 OPTIMUS ONKYO PHILIPS PIONEER REVOX SANSUI SHARP SHERWOOD SONY TEAC TECHNICS WARDS YAMAHA 0034, 0064, 0204, 0334 0364, 0374 0094 0034, 0044, 0064 0354 0094, 0344 0264 0334 0054, 0084, 0324 0194, 0254 0074, 0314 0034 0004, 0014, 0104, 0114, 0164, 0174, 0264 RXV650_U_cv.fm Page 1 Thursday, January 15, 2004 3:28 PM U RX-V650 AV Receiver © 2004 YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A. YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, F.R. OF GERMANY YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA All rights reserved. OWNER’S MANUAL Printed in Malaysia WC85550